Home

Enterprise-class User Manual

1. QCE Type Type Value Traffic Class o Tag Priority _ QoS Statistics This page provides statistics for the different queues for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The QoS Statistics screen in Figure 4 66 appears 132 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 66 QoS Statistics page screenshot QoS Statistics for Switch 1 Low Queue Normal Queue Medium Queue High Queue Port r ooo t _ 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 876 0 0 0 0 0 9 85 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Z 68423963 431542 0 0 0 0 9406 189409 8 433865 68204050 0 0 0 0 103222 1245 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 49 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 21 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 23 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 sT1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 ST2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Autorotesh D This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Low Queue There are 4 QoS queues per port with strict or weighted queuing scheduling This is the lowest priority queue Normal Queue This is the normal priority queue of the 4 QoS queues
2. LACP Statistics Description Show LACP Statistics Syntax LACP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LACP statistics Example Show LACP statistics of port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp statistics 1 4 Port Rx Frames Tx Frames Rx Unknown Rx Illegal 264 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode VLAN Configuration Command VLAN Configuration Description Show VLAN configuration Syntax VLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show VLAN status of port1 SWITCH gt vlan configuration 1 Mode IEEE 802 10 Port PVID IngrFilter FrameType LinkType Q in Q Mode Eth type UnTag Disable N A VLAN Mode Description Set or show the VLAN Mode Syntax VLAN Mode portbased dot1q Parameters portbased_ Port Based VLAN Mode dotlq 802 1Q VLAN Mode GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 265 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Default Setting Dot1q Example Set VLAN mode in port base SWITCH gt vlan mode portbased VLAN PVID Description Set or show the port VLAN ID Syntax VLAN PVID lt port_list gt lt vid gt none Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt vid gt none Port VLAN ID 1 4095 or none default Show port VLAN ID Default Setting
3. 4 4 4 4 1181201221241 4 11711941211231 4 4 r to get help isabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 0 1 114 33 49 11 ITCH gt Connected 00 43 53 ANSIW 115200 6 N 1 Kats Configure IP address 3 On Switch gt prompt enter the following command and press lt Enter gt As show in Figure 5 3 Switch gt ip setup 192 168 1 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 237 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface The previous command would apply the follow settings for the Switch IP 192 168 1 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Gateway 192 168 1 1 Figure 5 3 Set IP address screen COM1_115200 HyperTerminal Bile Edit Wew Call Transfer Help b 4 3 aD oe ey fis load managed 190 Welcome to GE Security Command Line Interface Port Numbers 1 2 GE 6 Bt 110112114116 1181201221241 1413 5 7f 9111113115 17119 21123 1211 a ta ta tat a ta tat tt tt Password ae me e se 3e Type help or to get help ip Disabled 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 es 168 6 1 114 99 49 11 SHITCH gt ip setup 192 168 1 100 255 255 255 0 192 168 1 1 SHITCH gt _ Connected 00 45 40 ANSIW 115200 8 N 1 4 Repeat Step 1 to check if the IP address is changed If the IP is successfully configured the Managed Switch will apply the n
4. 2 NM oE GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 33 Chapter 2 Installation 34 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 3 Switch Management This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the Managed Switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device work station or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Requirements Management Access Overview Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading Requirements Workstations of subscribers running Windows 98 ME NT4 0 2000 XP MAC OS9 or later Linux UNIX or other platform compatible with TCP IP protocols Workstation installed with Ethernet NIC Network Interface Card Ethernet Port connect Network cables Use standard network UTP cables with RJ45 connectors Above Workstation installed with WEB Browser and JAVA runtime environment Plug in GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 35 Chapter 3 Switch Management NOTE We recommend using Internet Explore 6 0 or above to access the Managed Switch Management Access Overview The Managed Switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage it using any or all of the following methods e Web bro
5. 7 Once the new software is loaded to the system successfully the Login screen appears Enter the user name and password to login to the Switch NOTE DO NOT Power OFF the switch until the update progress is complete NOTE Do not quit the Firmware Upgrade page without pressing the OK button after the image be loaded Or the system won t apply the new firmware User has to repeat the firmware upgrade processes again Configuration Save This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The screen in Figure 4 15 appears Figure 4 15 Configuration Save page screenshot Configuration Save GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 57 Chapter 4 Web based Management You can save view or load the switch configuration The configuration file is in XML format with a hierarchy of tags Header tags lt xml version 1 0 gt and lt configuration gt These tags are mandatory and must be present at the beginning of the file Section tags lt platform gt lt global gt and lt switch gt The platform section must be the first section tag and this section must include the correct platform ID and version The global section is optional and includes configuration which is not related to specific switch ports The switch section is optional and includes configuration which is related to specific switch ports Module tags lt ip gt lt mac gt lt port gt e
6. Chapter 6 Command Line Mode RSTP P2P Description Set or show the RSTP point2point parameter Syntax RSTP P2P lt port_list gt enable disable auto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable RSTP point2point disable Disable RSTP point2point auto Automatic RSTP point2point detection Default Setting Auto Example Enable RSTP P2P mode for port1 SWITCH gt rstp p2p 1 enable RSTP Status Description Show RSTP status Syntax RSTP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 277 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Show RSTP status SWITCH gt rstp status a 32771 00 30 4f 24 24 c1 32771 00 30 4f 24 24 c1 Disabled Disabled 1 No Yes RSTP RSTP Statistics Description Show RSTP statistics Syntax RSTP Statistics lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports RSTP mCheck Description Set the RSTP mCheck Migration Check variable for ports Syntax RSTP Mcheck lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 278 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Multicast Configuration Command IGMP Configuration Description Show IGMP snooping configuration Syntax IGMP Configuration lt port_list gt
7. Figure 4 110 Static MAC Table Configuration page screenshot Static MAC Table Configuration for Switch 1 Port Delete VLANID MAC Address 1 2 al a s G 7 9 10 11 12 13 14115 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 o 1 90 30 4F a 8 ccC E OOO OOOOODOCOCOODOOOO0O00L G GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 197 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the entry MAC Address The MAC address for the entry Port Members Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry Adding a New Static Entry MAC Address Click to add a new entry to the static MAC table Specify the VLAN ID MAC address and port members for the new entry Click Save Table Status Dynamic MAC Table Entries in the MAC Table are shown on this page The MAC Table contains up to 8192 entries and is sorted first by VLAN ID then by MAC address Figure 4 111 MAC Address Table Status MAC Address Table for Switch I stan tomvLAN 21 _rsee wen antec 2 00 00 20 00 0000 20 menama Retest 30 gt gt Purl Members MAC Address cou 1 7 3 a 3 7 jala in a1 a wR jiajin ia 17 18 10 30 71 gt 2 73 24ST sr 198 Type VIAN Dyneme UY 0J 74 68 08 18 7 Dynemi
8. enable disable lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable shaper disable Disable shaper default Show shaper mode lt bit_rate gt Rate in 1000 bits per second 500 1000000 kbps Default Setting Disabled 500kbps Example Set 1000kbps shaper for port 9 16 SWITCH gt qos shaper 9 16 enable 1000 QoS Unicast Description Set or show the unicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Unicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable unicast storm control disable Disable unicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 291 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Enable unicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm unicast enable 1k QoS Multicast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Multicast enable disable lt packet_rate gt Parameters enable Enable multicast storm control disable Disable multicast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable multicast storm rate limiter in 1kpps SWITCH gt qos storm multicast enable 1k QoS Broadcast Description Set or show the multicast storm rate limiter Syntax QoS Storm Broa
9. eont E SEE Firmware file name GE DSSG 244_v10b Upgrade This page includes the following fields Object Description TFTP Server IP Fill in your TFTP server IP address Filename The name of firmware image Maximum length 24 characters Upgrade button Press the button for upgrade the switch firmware To open Firmware Upgrade screen perform the following 1 Click System gt TFTP Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 12 3 Fill in the TFTP server IP Address and the firmware file name click the Upgrade button of the main page the system would pop up the confirm message shown in Figure 4 13 Figure 4 13 TFTP Firmware upgrade pop up message Windows Internet Explorer re you sure to start TFTP firmware upgrade Please check the TFTP server 192 168 0 52 is reachable The file GE D55G 244_ 10b090925 dat is the correct firmware Filename on TFTP server i Cancel 56 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management 4 Click OK the Managed Switch will start the TFTP upgrade procedure 5 Please check your TFTP server application to confirm the TFTP file is transmitting to the Managed Switch Figure 4 14 Firmware upgrade pop up message Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 The Switch will reboot then and It will take 2 to 3 minutes for the TFTP firmware upgrade and reboot procedure Please wait for the process complete
10. Straight Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 Crossover Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 2 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Green 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 341 Appendix A RJ 45 Pin Assignment 342 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Appendix B Glossary Term ACE ACL Aggregation Definition ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It describes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specif
11. This page includes the following fields Object Description Mode There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports Classification mode Allocation mode Auto mode Port class if available Power allocation if available Port power consumption Consumption Priority mode The default PoE management mode is Auto mode Power Supply Set limit value of the total PoE port provided power to the PDs For GE DSSG 244 POE the available max value is 220 Local Port This is the logical port number for this row PoE Enabled The PoE Enabled represents whether the PoE is enable for the port Priority The Priority represents the ports priority There are three levels of power priority named Low High and Critical The priority is used in the case where the remote devices requires uses more power than power supply can deliver In this case the port with the lowest priority will be turn off starting from the port with the lowest port number Maximum Power The Maximum Power value contains a numerical value that indicates the maximum power in watts that can be delivered to a remote device Power Allocation 228 It can limit the port PoE supply watts Per port maximum value must less 15 4 total ports values must less than the Power Reservation value Once power overload detected the port will auto shut down and keep on detection
12. don t care RARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their target hardware address field THA settings 0 RARP frames where THA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 RARP frames where THA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Ethernet Length Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address length HLN and protocol address length PLN settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLN is equal to Ethernet 0x06 and the PLN is equal to IPv4 0x04 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP hardware address space HRD settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the HLD is equal to Ethernet 1 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Ethernet Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their ARP RARP protocol address space PRO settings 0 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 must not match this entry 1 ARP RARP frames where the PRO is equal to IP 0x800 must match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE
13. 1 AC power cord not inserted or faulty 2 Check that the AC power cord is inserted correctly 3 Replace the power cord if the cord is inserted correctly check that the AC power source is working by connecting a different device in place of the switch 4 If that device works refer to the next step 5 If that device does not work check the AC power Stacking not functioning Solution 1 Check that modules are installed correctly 2 GE Security CB STX50 or CB STX200 cables not installed correctly LEDs on front panel STX1 or STX2 do not light 3 Check that the cables are inserted correctly 4 The stack cable is GE Security proprietary stack cable the stack cable is cross overed HDMI like cable and the normal HDMI cable can t be used for the GE DSSG 244 series While IP Address be changed or forgotten admin password To reset the IP address to the default IP Address 192 168 0 100 or reset the password to default value Press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device is rebooted you can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx 336 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 9 Troubleshooting GE DS 242 PoE Console e e o k J 2 Ca 57600 N 8 1 Y Po In Use Reset GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 337 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 338 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Appendix A RJ 45
14. 10 12 watts armenia PoE Splitter PoE Splitter split the PoE 48V DC over the Ethernet cable into 5 9 12V DC power output It frees the device deployment from restrictions due to power outlet locations which eliminate the costs for additional AC wiring and reduces the installation time 3 12 watts Power Configuration In a power over Ethernet system operating power is applied from a power source PSU power supply unit over the LAN infrastructure to powered devices PDs which are connected to ports Under some conditions the total output power required by PDs can exceed the maximum available power provided by the PSU The system may a prior be planed with a PSU capable of supplying less power than the total potential power consumption of all the PoE ports in the system In order to maintain the majority of ports active power management is implemented Measuring voltage and current monitors the PSU input power consumption The input power consumption is equal to the system s aggregated power consumption The power management concept allows all ports to be active and activates additional ports as long as the aggregated power of the system is lower than the power level at which additional PDs cannot be connected When this value is exceeded ports will be deactivated according to user defined priorities The power budget is managed according to the following user definable parameters maximum available power ports priority and maximu
15. 154 Two buttons are available for each row The buttons are only enabled when authentication is globally enabled and the port s GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Admin State is Auto or MAC Based Clicking these buttons will not cause settings changed on the page to take effect Reauthenticate Schedules a reauthentication to whenever the quiet period of the port runs out port based authentication For MAC based authentication reauthentication will be attempted immediately The button only has effect for successfully authenticated ports clients and will not cause the port client to get temporarily unauthorized Reinitialize Forces a reinitialization of the port clients and thereby a reauthentication immediately The port clients will transfer to the unauthorized state while the reauthentication is ongoing GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 155 Chapter 4 Web based Management 802 1X Port Status This page provides an overview of the current IEEE 802 1X port states for the selected switch The 802 1X Port Status screen in Figure 4 81 appears Figure 4 81 802 1X Status page screenshot 802 1X Status for Switch 1 State Last Source Last ID 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled
16. 30 Example Set re transmission time in 60 seconds SWITCH gt dot1x timeout 60 Dot1x Statistics Description Show 802 1X statistics Syntax Dot1x Statistics lt port_list gt clear eapol radius Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear statistics eapol Show EAPOL statistics radius Show RADIUS statistics default Show all statistics Dot1x Clients Description Set or show the maximum number of allowed clients for MAC based ports Syntax Dot1x Clients lt port_list gt all lt client_cnt gt GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 299 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all lt client_cnt gt MAC based authentication Set maximum number of clients allowed on a port all Allow all new clients lt client_cnt gt A number gt 1 default Show current maximum Default Setting All Dotix Agetime Description Time in seconds between check for activity on successfully authenticated MAC addresses Syntax Dot1x Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt Time between checks for activity on a MAC address that succeeded authentication default Show age time Default Setting 300 Example Set age time in 100 seconds SWITCH gt dot1x agetime 100 300 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Dotix Holdtime
17. Check or uncheck as needed to modify the entry GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management IEEE 802 1X Network Access Control Overview of 802 1X Port Based Authentication In the 802 1X world the user is called the supplicant the switch is the authenticator and the RADIUS server is the authentication server The switch acts as the man in the middle forwarding requests and responses between the supplicant and the authentication server Frames sent between the supplicant and the switch are special 802 1X frames known as EAPOL EAP Over LANs frames EAPOL frames encapsulate EAP PDUs RFC3748 Frames sent between the switch and the RADIUS server are RADIUS packets RADIUS packets also encapsulate EAP PDUs together with other attributes like the switch s IP address name and the supplicant s port number on the switch EAP is very flexible in that it allows for different authentication methods like MD5 Challenge PEAP and TLS The important thing is that the authenticator the switch doesn t need to know which authentication method the supplicant and the authentication server are using or how many information exchange frames are needed for a particular method The switch simply encapsulates the EAP part of the frame into the relevant type EAPOL or RADIUS and forwards it When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a special packet containing a success or failure indication Besides
18. Contact The system contact configured in SNMP System Information System Contact Name The system name configured in SNMP System Information System Name Location The system location configured in SNMP System Information System Location MAC Address The MAC Address of this switch System Date The current GMT system time and date The system time is obtained through the configured SNTP Server if any System Uptime The period of time the device has been operational Switch ID The switch ID GE DSSG 244 series Only Software Version The software version of the switch Software Date The date when the switch software was produced GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 49 Chapter 4 Web based Management Buttons Auto refresh check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refresh click to refresh the page any changes made locally will be undone For the GE DSSG 244 series stackable switch the System Information page add additional column to identify the current switch ID of stack member switches in a stack group The screen as below appears Figure 4 7 System Information System Information Contact Name GE DSSG 244 PoE Location Hardware MAC Address 00 30 4 76 26 93 Power Status AC Power Temperature 470C 1166F System Date 1970 01 01 Thu 00 03 38 0000 System Uptime Od 00 03 38 v1 0b090925 v1 0b090925 v1 0b090925 Auto r
19. Enabled Enable SNMP trap inform mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap inform mode operation 66 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Object Chapter 4 Web based Management Description Trap Inform Timeout seconds Indicates the SNMP trap inform timeout The allowed range is 0 to 2147 Trap Inform Retry Times Indicates the SNMP trap inform retry times The allowed range is 0 to 255 Trap Probe Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Possible values are Enabled Enable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap probe security engine ID mode of operation Trap Security Engine ID Indicates the SNMP trap security engine ID SNMPv3 sends traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique engine ID for these traps and informs is needed When Trap Probe Security Engine ID is enabled the ID will be probed automatically Otherwise the ID specified in this field is used The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed Trap Security Name Indicates the SNMP trap security name SNMPv3 traps and informs using USM for authentication and privacy A unique security name is needed when traps and informs are enabled SNMPv3 Configuration SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Configure SNMPv3 accesses table on this
20. It has higher priority than the Low Queue Medium Queue This is the medium priority queue of the 4 QoS queues It has higher priority than the Normal Queue High Queue This is the highest priority queue of the 4 QoS queues Receive Transmit The number of received and transmitted packets per port GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 133 Chapter 4 Web based Management Bandwidth Control Configure the switch port rate limit for Policers and Shapers on this page The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen Bandwidth Control in Figure 4 67 appears Figure 4 67 Bandwidth Control page screenshot Bandwidth Control Configuration for Switch 1 2 0 0 0 0 E p Policer Enabled o o o Oo o O o m o O o Oo o o o O o m o O o Oo o E oonooo0o0o0o0o000n00n onn This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Policer Enabled Enable or disable the port policer The default value is Disabled Policer Rate Configure the rate for the port policer The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 500 1000000 when the Policer Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Policer Unit is 134 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Mbps Policer Unit
21. Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting IGMP Mode Disabled Flooding Disabled Example Enable IGMP mode SWITCH gt igmp mode enable IGMP Mode Description Set or show the IGMP snooping mode Syntax IGMP Mode enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP snooping disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting Disabled GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 279 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Enable IGMP mode SWITCH gt igmp mode enable IGMP State Description Set or show the IGMP snooping state for VLAN Syntax IGMP State lt vid gt enable disable Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP snooping disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting VID State 1 Enabled Example Enable IGMP mode SWITCH gt igmp mode enable IGMP State Description Set or show the IGMP snooping state for VLAN Syntax IGMP State lt vid gt enable disable 280 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP snooping disable Disable IGMP snooping default Show IGMP snooping mode Default Setting Enable Example Disable VID 1 SWITCH gt igmp state 1 disable IGMP Querier Descriptio
22. PowerDsine http www microsemi com PowerDsine Linear Tech http www linear com GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 331 Chapter 8 Power Over Ethernet Overview The PoE Provision Process While adding PoE support to networked devices is relatively painless it should be realized that power cannot simply be transferred over existing CAT 5 cables Without proper preparation doing so may result in damage to devices that are not designed to support provision of power over their network interfaces The PSE is the manager of the PoE process In the beginning only small voltage level is induced on the port s output till a valid PD is detected during the Detection period The PSE may choose to perform classification to estimate the amount of power to be consumed by this PD After a time controlled start up the PSE begins supplying the 48 VDC level to the PD till it is physically or electrically disconnected Upon disconnection voltage and power shut down Since the PSE is responsible for the PoE process timing it is the one generating the probing signals prior to operating the PD and monitoring the various scenarios that may occur during operation All probing is done using voltage induction and current measurement in return Stages of powering up a PoE link f Volts specified Volts managed Stage Action l per 802 3af by chipset AEAN Measure whether powered device has the correct 2 7 10 0 1 8 10 0 signature resistance o
23. Set up Typical Network Application Rules According to your selection on the previous page this wizard will create specific QCEs QoS Control Entries automatically First select the QCL ID for these QCEs and then select the traffic class Different parameter options are displayed depending on your selection ccro l Q Traffic Class Low Normal Medium High Cancel Wizard lt Back Next gt This page includes the following fields Object Description QCL ID Select the QCL ID to which these QCEs apply Traffic Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets The screen in Figure 4 64 appears Figure 4 64 Set up ToS Precedence Mapping page screenshot Set up ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets QCL ID 1g ToS Precedence 0 Class Low ToS Precedence 1 Class Low ToS Precedence 2Class Low ToS Precedence 3 Class Low ToS Precedence 4 Class Low ToS Precedence 5 Class Low ToS Precedence 6 Class Low ToS Precedence 7 Class Low KIKIKI EI EIEI lt i lt 130 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description QCL ID Select the QCL ID
24. We wish to make the GE DSSG 244 series switch with MAC 00 30 4f 76 c4 2b Switch ID 2 to become the Stack Master and swap the Switch ID to 1 e Select the switch with ID 1 and assign a new ID for this unit for example ID 4 Figure 4 129 Assigning new ID for current master Stack Configuration 00 30 4 76 26 93 1 Yes 3 GE DSSG 244 PoE GE Security GE DSSG 244 PoE Managed Switch O 00 30 4 76 ct 2 1 Yes 3m GEDSSG 244 GE Securty GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch oo so at 24 24 2 3 Yes 3m GE DSSG 244 GE Security GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch C Start Master Election 7 e Select the target switch and set up with lower priority 1 also re assign the Switch ID 1 for it After that click Save click Start Master Election and save again GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 221 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 130 Assigning a lower priority value for the target switch 3 v GE DSSG 244 PoE GE Security GE DSSG 244 PoE Managed Switch GE Security GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch e Reflashing the web browser the switch with MAC address 00 30 4f 76 26 93 now becomes the Stack Master Figure 4 131 The result after master election Step 6 After the Stack Master and Members have been configured any switch in the stack can be managed from the web agent by choosing the desired Member ID from the Switch drop down menu 222 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and
25. Write Community private Engine ID my 6000072501 101 J See Reset This page includes the following fields Object Description Mode Indicates the SNMP mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP mode operation Version Indicates the SNMP supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP supported version 1 SNMP vec Set SNMP supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP supported version 3 Read Community Indicates the community read access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string will associate with SNMPv3 community s table 64 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Write Community Indicates the community write access string to permit access to SNMP agent The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 The field only suits to SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c SNMPv3 is using USM for authentication and privacy and the community string will associate with SNMPv3 community s table Engine ID Indicates the SNMPv3 engine ID The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed
26. and configures the path cost according to the values shown below Path cost 0 is used to indicate auto configuration mode When the short path cost method is selected and the default path cost recommended by the IEEE 8021w standard exceeds 65 535 the default is set to 65 535 Table 4 1 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Port Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet 50 600 200 000 20 000 000 Fast Ethernet 10 60 20 000 2 000 000 Gigabit Ethernet 3 10 2 000 200 000 116 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Table 4 2 Recommended STP Path Cost Range Chapter 4 Web based Management Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1D 1998 IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet Half Duplex 100 2 000 000 Full Duplex 95 1 999 999 Trunk 90 1 000 000 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 19 200 000 Full Duplex 18 100 000 Trunk 15 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 4 10 000 Trunk 3 5 000 Table 4 3 Default STP Path Costs Port Type Link Type IEEE 802 1w 2001 Ethernet Half Duplex 2 000 000 Full Duplex 1 000 000 Trunk 500 000 Fast Ethernet Half Duplex 200 000 Full Duplex 100 000 Trunk 50 000 Gigabit Ethernet Full Duplex 10 000 Trunk 5 000 RSTP Port Status This page displays the RSTP port status for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The RSTP Port Status screen in Figure 4 55 appears GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 117 Chapter 4 We
27. e Ring Stack A ring of switches thereby providing redundant forwarding paths Figure 4 119 Ring Stack topology ele GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management e Back to Back Stack Two switches interconnected on both stacking ports Figure 4 120 Back to back Stack topology Stack This section provides information for understand stacking architecture include the below items e Switch IDs o Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs o Removing a Switch From the Stack o Replacing a Switch o General Switch ID Assignment Rules e Master Election e Stack Redundancy e Shortest Path Forwarding Switch IDs The Switch ID 1 16 assigned to a GE DSSG 244 series Switch e Assigning and Swapping Switch IDs When a switch is added to the stack a Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch The automatic SID assignment can be modified by choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page This method allows Switch IDs to be assigned so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch The Switch IDs of two switches can be swapped by simply interchanging the values in the Switch ID column GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 213 Chapter 4 Web based Management NOTE Changing Switch IDs does not result in any interruption of the stack operation e Removing a Switch From the Stack When a switch is removed from the stack the configuration for the switch
28. eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 123 Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Type Value Configure the values according to the QCE type you select Ethernet Type The allowed values for this type range from 0x600 1536 to OxFFFF 65535 VLAN ID The allowed values for this type range from 1 to 4095 TCP UDP Port Range Specify whether there is a range or a specific port number The port range allowed is from 0 to 65535 DSCP The allowed range is 0 to 63 ToS or Tag Priority do not have type value settings Traffic Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE If the QCE type is ToS or Tag Priority there are 8 rows of traffic class that can be configured for each priority Port QoS Configuration This page allows you to configure QoS settings for each port Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by a QCL that is assigned to each port A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS class for the port The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the pa
29. non condensing 20 C 70 degree C 20 95 non condensing GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction 12 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 13 Chapter 2 Installation This section describes the hardware features and installation of the Managed Switch on the desktop or rack mount For easier management and control of the Managed Switch familiarize yourself with its display indicators and ports Front panel illustrations in this chapter display the unit LED indicators Before connecting any network device to the Managed Switch please read this chapter completely GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 15 Chapter 2 Installation Hardware Description Switch Front Panel The unit front panel provides a simple interface for monitoring the Managed Switch Figures 2 1 through 2 3 show the front panels of the Managed Switches Figure 2 1 GE DSG 244 Front Panel EH HH H TEN a J in u C v I z p jal E H 4 H H uu Mm Mm im J 7 7 g 7 E 7 7 7 n 3 T za gt ee Gigabit TP Interface 10 100 1000Base T Copper RJ 45 Twist Pair Up to 100 meters Gigabit SFP Slots 1000Base SX LX mini GBIC slot SFP Small Factor Pluggable transceiver module From 550 meters Multi mode fiber up to 10 30 50 70 120 kilometers Single mode fiber Console Port The console port is a DB9 RS
30. verify that you have the required stack cables The following cables are used to connect stacked switches e CB STX50 50cm Short stack cable used to connect adjacent GE DSSG 244 series switches e CB STX200 200cm Long Redundant stack cable used to connect the top and bottom GE DSSG 244 series switches of a stack 30 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation There are two high performance HDMI like Stack ports on the rear panel for proprietary management stack Only attached GE Security CB STX50 and CB STX200 cross overed HDMI cable can be used STEP 1 Plug one end of the cable in the STX1 Cascade Down port and the other end to the STX2 Cascade UP port of next device STEP 2 Repeat the step for every device in the stack cluster then ending at last switch Figure 2 18 Stacking connection STX1 STX2 A STEP 3 If you wish to implement stack redundancy use the long stack cable CB STX200 to connect the stack port marked STX1 Cascade Down on the bottom switch to the port marked STX2 Cascade Up on the top switch of the stack NOTE The stack port is for management and data packets to be transmitted between other GE DSSG 244 series stackable switches the stack ports can t be configured with Layer 2 features via management interface STEP 4 Power up the stack switches GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 31 Chapter 2 Installation Management Stacking The
31. 1 Example Set PVID2 for port20 SWITCH gt vlan pvid 20 2 VLAN Frame Type Description Set or show the port VLAN frame type Syntax VLAN FrameType lt port_list gt all tagged 266 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports all Allow tagged and untagged frames tagged Allow tagged frames only default Show accepted frame types Default Setting All Example Set port20 that allow tagged frames only SWITCH gt vlan frametype 20 tagged VLAN Ingress Filter Description Set or show the port VLAN ingress filter Syntax VLAN IngressFilter lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable VLAN ingress filtering disable Disable VLAN ingress filtering default Show VLAN ingress filtering Default Setting Disable Example Enable VLAN ingress filtering for port20 SWITCH gt vlan ingressfilter 20 enable GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 267 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode VLAN Link Type Description Set or show the port VLAN link type Syntax VLAN LinkType lt port_list gt untagged tagged Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports untagged _ VLAN Link Type Tagged tagged VLAN Link Type Untagged Default Setting Un tagged Example Enable tagged frame for por
32. 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The switch port number LACP Yes means that LACP is enabled and the port link is up No means that LACP is not enabled or that the port link is down Key The key assigned to this port Only ports with the same key can aggregate together Aggr ID The Aggregation ID assigned to this aggregation group IDs 1 and 2 are GLAGs while IDs 3 14 are LLAGs Partner System ID The partners System ID MAC address Partner Port The partners port number connected to this port LACP statistics This page provides an overview for LACP statistics for all ports The LACP statistics screen in Figure 4 44 appears Figure 4 44 LACP Port statistics page screenshot LACP Port Status for Switch 1 Port LACP Key Aggr ID Sei Ea Port 1 No z LOW amp wt A Auto refresh C GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 89 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The switch port number LACP Transmitted Shows how many LACP frames have been sent from each port LACP Received Shows how many LACP frames have been received at each port Discarded Shows how many unknown or illegal LACP frames have been discarded at each port VLAN VLAN Overview A Virtual Local Area Network VLAN is a network topology configu
33. 308 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Lookup state of Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 SWITCH gt mac lookup 00 30 4f 01 01 02 MAC Age Time Description Set or show the MAC address age timer Syntax MAC Agetime lt age_time gt Parameters lt age_time gt MAC address age time 10 1000000 default Show age time Default Setting 300 Example Set agetime value in 30 SWITCH gt mac agetime 30 MAC Learning Description Set or show the port learn mode Syntax MAC Learning lt port_list gt auto disable secure Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports auto Automatic learning disable Disable learning secure Secure learning default Show learn mode GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 309 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Default Setting Auto Example Set secure learning mode in port1 SWITCH gt mac learning 1 secure MAC Dump Description Show sorted list of MAC address entries Syntax MAC Dump lt mac_max gt lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_max gt Maximum number of MAC addresses 1 8192 default Show all addresses lt mac_addr gt First MAC address xx xx xx XX XX Xx default MAC address zero lt vid gt First VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Show all of MAC table SWITCH gt mac dump MAC Statistics Description Show MAC address table statist
34. 660350309 0 0 0 0 345 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 R 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 u 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 19 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 z 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 24 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 st 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SR 0 0 9 0 o o 0 o 0 Auto refresh C Refresh Clear GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 75 Chapter 4 Web based Management The displayed counters are Object Description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Packets The number of received and transmitted packets per port Bytes The number of received and transmitted bytes per port Errors The number of frames received in error and the number of incomplete transmissions per port Drops The number of frames discarded due to ingress or egress congestion Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Detailed Port Statistics This page provides detailed traffic statistics for a specific switch port Use the port select box to select which switch port details to display The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The displayed counters are the totals for receive and transmit the size counters for receive and transmit and the error counters for receive and transmi
35. BOOTP and DHCP for IP address assignment Firmware upload download via HTTP TFTP SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol e Stacking GE DSSG 244 and GE DSSG 244 PoE O O O O O Hardware stack up to 16 units and 384 ports Stacking architecture supports Chain and Ring mode Mirror across stack Link Aggregation groups spanning multiple switches in a stack Hardware learning with MAC table synchronization across stack e Power over Ethernet GE DSSG 244 POE Only O O O Complies with IEEE 802 3af Power over Ethernet End Span PSE Up to 24 IEEE 802 3af devices powered Support PoE Power up to 15 4 watts for each PoE ports Auto detect powered device PD Circuit protection prevent power interference between ports Remote power feeding up to 100m PoE Management Total PoE power budget control Pert port PoE function enable disable PoE Port Power feeding priority Per PoE port power limit PD classification detection GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Product Specification product _ GE DSG 244 GE DSSG 244 PoE GE DSSG 244 Hardware Specification 8 10 24 10 100 1000Base T 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X RJ 45 Auto ports with IEEE 802 3af MDI MDI x ports PoE injector 24 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports 4 SFP interfaces shared 4 SFP interfaces shared 24 SFP interfaces with Port 21 to Port 24 with Port 21 to Port 24 1000Base SXx LX
36. Change of the Engine ID will clear all original local users SNMP System Information Configuration The switch system information is provided here The System Information Configuration screen in Figure 4 24 appears Figure 4 24 System Information Configuration page screenshot System Information Configuration System Contact j System Name GE DSSG 244 System Location See This page includes the following fields Object Description System Contact The textual identification of the contact person for this managed node together with information on how to contact this person The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 System Name An administratively assigned name for this managed node By convention this is the node s fully qualified domain name A domain name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character And the first or last character must not be a minus sign The allowed string length is 0 to 255 System Location The physical location of this node e g telephone closet 3rd floor The allowed string length is 0 to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 65 Chapter 4 Web based Management SNMP Trap Configuration Config
37. Configuration for Switch 1 Port LACP Enabled Key Role i Auo S Actwe D 2 o Auto Actwe bg 3 D Auto K Acte D 4 go Auto oy Actve B 5 o Auto S Actwe bg 6 o Awo D Acre J 7 o Auto D Actwe B 8 o Auto B Actwe B 9 Auto S Actwe fg 10 o Auto D Active D u C Auto D Active D 12 o Ato D Acte D 13 Auto D Actne D is o Ato Q Atre D 15 o Auto v Active D 16 o Auto D Acte D 1 Aut vi Actwe D 18 C Auto N Actwe D 1 0 Auto S Actve D 0 o Auto B Actwe D o Auo S Actwe D 2 Oo Auto D Actve D o Auto D Actwe D o Awo K Actwe B 86 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The switch port number LACP Enabled Controls whether LACP is enabled on this switch port LACP will form an aggregation when 2 or more ports are connected to the same partner LACP can form max 12 LLAGs per switch and 2 GLAGs per stack Key The Key value incurred by the port range 1 65535 The Auto setting will set the key as appropriate by the physical link speed 10Mb 1 100Mb 2 1Gb 3 Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered Ports with the same Key value can participate in the same aggregation group while ports with different keys cannot The default setting is Auto Role The Role shows the LACP activity status The Active will transmit LACP packets each second while Passive will wait for a LACP packet
38. Configure the unit of measure for the port policer rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Shaper Enabled Enable or disable the port shaper The default value is Disabled Shaper Rate Configure the rate for the port shaper The default value is 500 This value is restricted to 500 1000000 when the Policer Unit is kbps and it is restricted to 1 1000 when the Policer Unit is Mbps Shaper Unit Configure the unit of measure for the port shaper rate as kbps or Mbps The default value is kbps Storm Control Configuration Storm control for the switch is configured on this page There three types of storm rate control e Unicast storm rate control e Multicast storm rate control e Broadcast storm rate control The rate is 2 n where n is equal to or less than 15 or No Limit The unit of the rate can be either pps packets per second or kpps kilopackets per second The configuration indicates the permitted packet rate for unicast multicast or broadcast traffic across the switch The Storm Control Configuration screen in Figure 4 68 appears Figure 4 68 Storm Control Configuration page screenshot Storm Control Configuration Frame Type Status Rate pe Unicast o 1 Multicast o 1 Broadcast o 1 M Reset GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 135 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Frame Type The settings in a p
39. Description Time in seconds before a MAC address that failed authentication gets a new authentication chance Syntax Dot1x Holdtime lt hold_time gt Parameters lt hold_time gt Hold time before MAC addresses that failed authentication expire default Show hold time Default Setting 10 Example Set hold time in 100 seconds SWITCH gt dot1x holdtime 100 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 301 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Access Control List Command ACL Configuration Description Show ACL Configuration Syntax ACL Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 300 Example Set age time in 100 seconds SWITCH gt dot1x agetime 100 ACL Action Description Set or show the ACL port default action Syntax ACL Action lt port_list gt permit deny lt rate_limiter gt lt port_copy gt lt logging gt lt shutdown gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable 302 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Defau
40. Disabled Disabled Disabled 187 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 102 Set up Source MAC and Secure IP Binding page screenshot Set up Source MAC and Source IP Binding for Switch 1 Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames that match the source MAC and source IP on specific port Binding Port Enabled Source MAC Address Source IP Address l 00 30 4F AA BB CC 192 168 0 200 IO g S 10 oo Cancel Wizard lt Back Next gt This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Binding Enabled Enable or disable the source IP and source MAC binding status for the given logical port Source MAC Address The source MAC address for the source IP and source MAC binding Source IP Address The source IP address for the source IP and source MAC binding The ACL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use 188 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 103 New Configuration Switch 1 Pot SMAC SIP Binding 1 192 168 0 200 Switch 1 Port SMAC SIP Binding 00 30 1 4f aa bb cc GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 189 Chapter 4 Web based Management Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control
41. Ethernet Status for Switch 1 Current Power Consumption 39 85 220 Total Power Reserved 62214 4 20 Temperature 1 39 C N02 F Temperature 2 39 C 102 F m i 0 0 0 High PoE OFF ay 2 0 0 oO High PoE OFF a 3 o 13 184 22 High PoE ON u 4 0 10 968 218 High PoE ON ao 5 0 11 104 220 High PoE ON a 6 3 4 594 31 High PoE ON o 7 0 0 0 High PoE OFF c 8 0 0 0 High PoE OFF a 3 0 0 0 High PoE OFF oo 10 0 0 e High PoE OFF a 11 0 0 0 High PoE OFF 12 0 0 0 High PoE OFF 13 0 0 0 High PoE OFF 14 o 0 o High PoE OFF 15 0 0 0 High PoE OFF 16 0 0 0 High PoE OFF 17 0 0 o High PoE OFF 18 0 0 0 High PoE OFF 19 0 0 0 High PoE OFF 20 0 0 o High PoE OFF 24 0 0 e High PoE OFF 22 0 0 0 High PoE OFF 23 0 0 o High PoE OFF 24 0 0 0 High PoE OFF Total 39 05 W 791 m4 Auto refresh C 224 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Power over Ethernet Powered Device Voice over IP phones A Enterprise can install POE VoIP Phone ATA and other Ethernet non Psi Ethernet end devices to the central where UPS is installed for un interrupt 3 5 watts power system and power control system Wireless LAN Access Points Museum Sightseeing Airport Hotel Campus Factory Warehouse can install the Access Point any where with no hesitation 6 12 watts IP Surveillance Enterprise Museum Campus Hospital Bank can install IP Camera without limits of install location no need electrician to install AC sockets
42. GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 229 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 135 Power over Ethernet Status Current Power Consumption HB9 m wine Total Power Reserved a ae aan Temperature 1 Temperature 2 Power Over Ethernet Status for Switch 1 ME 39 796 220 W 62 214 220 W 42 C 108 F 41 C1 106 F PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE ON PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF PoE OFF wo 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 eoocoocoocoococoecececeoceeeco ooo ooooocooococoecococeo Auto refresh This page includes the following fields Object Description Current Power Consumption Show the total watts usage of PoE Switch Total Power Reserved Shows how much the total power be reserved for all PDs PoE Temperature Unit 1 Display the current operating temperature of PoE chip unit 1 The unit 1 is in charge of PoE Port 1 Port 12 PoE Temperature Unit 2 Display the current operating temperature of PoE chip unit 2 The unit 1 is in charge of PoE Port 13 Port 24 Local Port This is the logical port number for this row 230 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Object Chapter 4 Web based Management Description PD Class Display the class of the PD attached
43. PoE configuration Syntax PoE Configuration Example 320 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode 22 Enabled High 23 Enabled High 24 Enabled High Power Supply Max Power management mode automode PoE Mode Description Set or show PoE mode Syntax PoE Mode lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enables PoE disable Disable PoE default Show PoE s mode PoE Priority Description Show Set PoE Priority Syntax PoE Priority lt port_list gt low high critical GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 321 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports low Set priority to low high Set priority to high critival Set priority to critical default Show PoE priority PoE Mgmt_mode Description Show Set PoE management mode Syntax PoE Mgmt_mode mgt_class mgt_alloc mgt_auto mgt_consumption mgt_priority Parameters mgt_class handle power allocation according to PD class mgt_alloc power allocated according to values entered in power allocate mgt_auto automatic mode according to the sequence class allocation consumption mgt_consumption allocated according to PD actual need with a maximum of 15 4 W per port mgt_priority max port power determined by priority default Show PoE power
44. RSTP Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 56 appears Figure 4 56 RSTP Statistics page screenshot RSTP Statistics for Switch 1 Transmitted Received Discarded RSTP STP TCN RSTP STP TCN Unknown Illegal No ports enabled Auto refresh C This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port RSTP The number of RSTP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port STP The number of legacy STP Configuration BPDU s received transmitted on the port TCN The number of legacy Topology Change Notification BPDU s received transmitted on the port Discarded Unknown The number of unknown Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port Discarded Illegal The number of illegal Spanning Tree BPDU s received and discarded on the port GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 119 Chapter 4 Web based Management Quality of Service Understand QOS Quality of Service QoS is an advanced traffic prioritization feature that allows you to establish control over network traffic QoS enables you to assign various grades of network service to different types of traffic such as multi media video protocol specific time critical and file backup traffic QoS reduces bandwidth limitations delay loss and jitter It also provides increased reliability for delivery of your data and allows you to prioritize certain application
45. SFP mini GBIC Slots and 100Base FxX 100Base FX SFP 100Base FX SFP SFP transceiver transceiver compatible transceiver compatible compatible Switch Processing Scheme Store and Forward Switch Fabric 48Gbps 68Gbps 68Gbps Address Table 8K entries Share data Buffer 1392 kilobytes IEEE 802 3x Pause Frame for Full Duplex Flow Control Back pressure for Half Duplex 1000 Link Act 10 100 1000 Link Act 1000 Link Act PoE In Use SFP Link 10 100 Link Act Stack Port Link 10 100 Link Act SFP Link 7 17 32 x 7 87 x 1 75 17 32 x 11 81 x 1 75 17 32 x 7 87 x Dimension 175 Weight 5 93 Ibs 9 92 Ibs 6 61 Ibs Power over Ethernet IEEE 802 3af Power over GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 9 Chapter 1 Introduction Per Port 48V DC 350mA Max 15 4 watts fowernassgnment ahs pocrowerouit feos pumberefPoemWw a RumbeoFPOGISAWERS OOOO OO OOO Stacking a fuoscbostom keimeroee sairone O ooo e sadingsondwan O kesro O Sere OHTA Sakopo rg Cninlbacki baksock Layer 2 function System Configuration Console Telnet Web Browser SNMPv1 v2c and v3 Port disable enable PoE Power Output Auto negotiation 10 100 1000Mbps full and half duplex mode Port configuration selection Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control Port Status ae status Auto negotiation status trunk status IEEE 802 3ad L
46. VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Lookup lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs Example Show VLAN status SWITCH gt vlan lookup 270 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode PVLAN Configuration Description Show Private VLAN configuration Syntax PVLAN Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports PVLAN Isolate Description Set or show the port isolation mode Syntax PVLAN Isolate lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port isolation disable Disable port isolation default Show port isolation port list Default Setting Promiscuous Example Enable isolate for port10 SWITCH gt pvlan isolate 10 enable GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 271 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Spanning Tree Protocol Command RSTP Configuration Description Show RSTP configuration Syntax RSTP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations Default Setting Disable Example Show RSTP status of port1 SWITCH gt rstp configuration 1 System Priority 32768 Max Age 20 Forward Delay 15 Protocol Version Normal Path Cost Priority Edge Point2point Disabled Auto 128 Enabled Auto RSTP SysPrio Descri
47. Web browser is an HTTP client sending requests to server machines An HTTP client initiates a request by establishing a Transmission Control Protocol TCP connection to a particular port on a remote host port 80 by default An HTTP server listening on that port waits for the client to send a request message HTTPS is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer It is used to indicate a secure HTTP connection HTTPS provide authentication and encrypted communication and is widely used on the World Wide Web for security sensitive communication such as payment transactions and corporate logons HTTPS is really just the use of Netscape s Secure Socket Layer SSL as a sublayer under its regular HTTP application layering HTTPS uses port 443 instead of HTTP port 80 in its interactions with the lower layer TCP IP SSL uses a 40 bit key size for the RC4 stream encryption algorithm which is considered an adequate degree of encryption for commercial exchange GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 345 Appendix B Glossary Term ICMP IEEE 802 1X IGMP IGMP Querier IMAP Definition ICMP is an acronym for Internet Control Message Protocol It is a protocol that generated the error response diagnostic or routing purposes ICMP messages generally contain information about routing difficulties or simple exchanges such as time stamp or echo transactions For example the PING command uses ICMP to
48. Web based Management Figure 4 113 LLDP Configuration page screenshot D R AAAA A AeA A AA AeA ROMO REBORN A e A R A AAAA AAAA AA AAAA AM M e BEEPS NANENANE n NEn Annn EnEn En Ennn BRAEFSRPARBERBRPAAASRRAEARAAE AAAA AAA eA eA A A BORO O ROBO ROMO REBEL A A at m oe et oe Re 203 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management LLDP Parameters Object Description Tx Interval The switch is periodically transmitting LLDP frames to its neighbors for having the network discovery information up to date The interval between each LLDP frame is determined by the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 5 32768 seconds Default 30 seconds This attribute must comply with the following rule Transmission Interval Hold Time Multiplier 65536 and Transmission Interval gt 4 Delay Interval Tx Hold Each LLDP frame contains information about how long the information in the LLDP frame shall be considered valid The LLDP information valid period is set to Tx Hold multiplied by Tx Interval seconds Valid values are restricted to 2 10 times TTL in seconds is based on the following rule Transmission Interval Holdtime Multiplier lt 65536 Therefore the default TTL is 4 30 120 seconds Tx Delay If some configuration is changed e g the IP address a new LLDP frame is transmitted but the time between the LLDP frames will always be at least
49. any arp ARP keyword lt sip gt Source IP address a b c d n or any lt dip gt Destination IP address a b c d n or any lt arp_opcode gt ARP operation code anylarp rarp other lt arp_flags gt ARP flags request smac tmac len ip ether 0 1 any ip IP Keyword lt protocol gt IP protocol number 0 255 or any lt ip_flags gt IP flags ttlloptions fragment 0 1 any icmp ICMP keyword lt icmp_type gt ICMP type number 0 255 or any lt icmp_code gt ICMP code number 0 255 or any udp UDP keyword lt sport gt Source UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any lt dport gt Destination UDP TCP port range 0 65535 or any tcp TCP keyword lt tcp_flags gt TCP flags fin syn rst psh ack urg 0 1 any permit Permit forwarding default deny Deny forwarding GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 305 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode lt rate_limiter gt Rate limiter number 1 15 or disable lt port_copy gt Port number for copy of frames or disable lt logging gt System logging of frames log log_disable lt shutdown gt Shut down ingress port shut shut_disable ACL Delete Description Delete ACE Syntax ACL Delete lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 1024 ACL Lookup Description Show ACE default All ACEs Syntax ACL Lookup lt ace_id gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 1024 ACL Clea
50. assigning a Switch ID of an inactive switch to a new switch the new switch will inherit the former s configuration see Replacing a Switch above 5 Deleting a switch will remove any configuration pertaining to it 6 Deleting an active switch will leave it with an unassigned Switch ID until rebooted or manually assigning a Switch ID 214 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Master Election Within a managed stack one master switch or just master must be elected Any switch not being master is a slave switch or just slave To elect a master the following criteria are evaluated sequentially 1 If any switch already claims to have been master for more than 30 seconds then that switch will become master 2 If multiple switches claim to have been master for more than 30 seconds then the switch which has been master for the longest period of time will become master 3 The switch with the smallest master priority 4 The switch with the smallest MAC address The above algorithm ensures that once a master has been elected and has been master for more than 30 seconds it will remain master However in some cases the user may want to enforce a new master election Stack Redundancy In the unlikely event that a GE DSSG 244 series switch fails in a stack stack integrity is maintained if the redundant cable is connected to the stack The affected switch within the sack can be re
51. ee o This page includes the following fields Object Description Router Port Specify which ports act as router ports A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads towards the Layer 3 multicast device or IGMP querier If an aggregation member port is selected as a router port the whole aggregation will act as a router port Fast Leave Enable the Fast Leave on the port 142 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management IGMP Snooping Status This page provides IGMP Snooping status The status relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Snooping status screen in Figure 4 75 appears Figure 4 75 IGMP Snooping status page screenshot 4 Querier ID Status Transmit R IGMP Snooping Status for Switch 1 Statistics Querier Querier V1 Reports V2 Reports V3 Reports V2 Leave ESER Seral eee eee l iaut ere DE 0 0 0 0 0 IGMP Groups Port Members VLAN ID Groups 123 4 5 6789 1011 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 Te This page includes the following fields Object Description VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry Groups The present IGMP groups Max are 128 groups for each VLAN Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Querier Status Show the Querier status is ACTIVE or IDLE Querier Transmit The number of Transmitted Querier Querier Receive The number
52. entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP SYN Specify the TCP Synchronize sequence numbers SYN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the SYN field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP PSH Specify the TCP Push Function PSH value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the PSH field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care TCP ACK Specify the TCP Acknowledgment field significant ACK value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the ACK field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 179 Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description TCP URG Specify the TCP Urgent Pointer field significant URG value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the URG field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the URG field is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care Ethernet Type Parameters The Ethernet Type parameters can be configured when Frame Type Ethernet Type is selected Object Description EtherType
53. flag to indicate that this user using MD5 authentication protocol SHA An optional flag to indicate that this user using SHA authentication protocol The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly Authentication Password A string identifying the authentication pass phrase For MD5 authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 32 For SHA authentication protocol the allowed string length is 8 to 40 The allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Privacy Protocol Indicates the privacy protocol that this entry should belong to Possible privacy protocol are None None privacy protocol DES An optional flag to indicate that this user using DES authentication protocol Privacy Password A string identifying the privacy pass phrase The allowed string length is 8 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 7A Chapter 4 Web based Management SNMPv3 Views Configuration Configure SNMPv3 views table on this page The entry index keys are View Name and OID Subtree The SNMPv3 Views Configuration screen in Figure 4 30 appears Figure 4 30 SNMPv3 Views Configuration page screenshot SNMPv3 Views Configuration O default view included J 1 Addnewview Save Reset J This page includes the following fields Descr
54. gt Port maximum frame size 1518 9600 default Show maximum frame size Default Setting 9600 252 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Set 2048 frame size for port1 SWITCH gt port maxframe 1 2048 Port Power Description Set or show the port PHY power mode Syntax Port Power lt port_list gt enable disable actiphy dynamic Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable all power control disable Disable all power control actiphy Enable ActiPHY power control dynamic Enable Dynamic power control Default Setting Enable Example Disable port power function for port1 4 SWITCH gt port power 1 4 disable Port Excessive Description Set or show the port excessive collision mode Syntax Port Excessive lt port_list gt discard restart GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 253 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports discard Discard frame after 16 collisions restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions default Show mode Default Setting Discard Example SWITCH gt port excessive 1 restart SWITCH gt port excessive 1 restart Port Statistics Description Show port statistics Syntax Port Statistics lt port_list gt lt command gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default
55. gt startup Yip Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Configuration Internet Explorer fp Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 Wizards Network Load Balancing Manager log E Terminal Services Configuration Esn 2 2 F Terminal Services Manager PK 9 13PM 7 Enter Active Directory Users and Computers create legal user data the next right click a user what you created to enter properties and what to be noticed 164 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 89 Add User Properties screen New Object User Eirst name Last name Full name U er logon name Figure 4 90 Add User Properties screen New Object User NOTE Set the Ports Authenticate Status to Force Authorized if the port is connected to the RADIUS server or the port is an uplink port that is connected to another switch Or once the 802 1X stat to work the switch might not be able to access the RADIUS server GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 165 Chapter 4 Web based Management 802 1X Client Configuration Windows XP is originally 802 1X support As to other operating systems windows 98SE ME 2000 an 802 1x client utility is needed The following procedures show how to configure 802 1X Authentication in Windows XP Please note that if you want to change the 802 1x authentication type of a wireless client i e switch to EAP TLS from EAP MD5
56. is preserved and the switch still appears on the Stack Configuration page If the configuration of the switch is not to be transferred to another switch then the configuration may be deleted by choosing Delete followed by Save e Replacing a Switch If a switch is to be replaced with another switch for example replacing failing hardware the following procedure must be used to assign the configuration of the failing switch to the new hardware 1 Remove the failing switch from the stack For example assume that the failing switch had Switch ID 3 2 Insert the new switch into the stack The new switch is assigned an unused Switch ID 3 To remove the automatic switch ID assignment choose Delete followed by Save The new switch is then shown with Switch ID set to 4 To assign the configuration of Switch ID 3 to the new hardware simply choose 3 in the Switch ID column and click Save 5 The new hardware has now taken over the configuration of the failing hardware e General Switch ID Assignment Rules When assigning Switch IDs to the devices in the stack you must note the following 1 Switches with assigned IDs can be changed to use any other switch ID possibly by swapping Switch ID with another active switch 2 When swapping two Switch IDs the devices will retain their own configuration except for the Switch ID 3 Switches without an assigned Switch ID can only be assigned to any unused ID 4 When
57. mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear Sender IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP address in dotted decimal notation Sender IP Mask When Network is selected for the sender IP filter you can enter a specific sender IP mask in dotted decimal notation Target IP Filter Specify the target IP filter for this specific ACE Any No target IP filter is specified Target IP filter is don t care Host Target IP filter is set to Host Specify the target IP address in the Target IP Address field that appears Network Target IP filter is set to Network Specify the target IP address and target IP mask in the Target IP Address and Target IP Mask fields that appear Target IP Address When Host or Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP address in dotted decimal notation Target IP Mask When Network is selected for the target IP filter you can enter a specific target IP mask in dotted decimal notation 174 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Object Chapter 4 Web based Management Description ARP SMAC Match Specify whether frames can hit the action according to their sender hardware address field SHA settings 0 ARP frames where SHA is not equal to the SMAC address 1 ARP frames where SHA is equal to the SMAC address Any Any value is allowed
58. only be restored by using another non secure port or by connecting to the switch via the serial interface GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 201 Chapter 4 Web based Management LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol Link Layer Discovery Protocol LLDP is used to discover basic information about neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value TLV format according to the IEEE 802 1ab standard and can include details such as device identification capabilities and configuration settings LLDP also defines how to store and maintain information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers Link Layer Discovery Protocol Media Endpoint Discovery LLDP MED is an extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP phones and network switches The LLDP MED TLVs advertise information such as network policy power inventory and device location details LLDP and LLDP MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify troubleshooting enhance network management and maintain an accurate network topology LLDP Configuration This page allows the user to inspect and configure the current LLDP port settings The LLDP Configuration screen in Figure 4 113 appears 202 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4
59. panel Figure 2 8 GE DSSG 244 PoE Rear panel 2 O aN WY NS jd SZ 22 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation AC Power Receptacle For compatibility with electric service in most areas of the world the Managed Switch s power supply automatically adjusts to line power in the range 100 240VAC and 50 60 Hz Plug the female end of the power cord firmly into the receptacle on the rear panel of the Managed Switch Plug the other end of the power cord into an electric service outlet then the power will be ready POWER NOTICE 1 The Managed Switch is a power required device it will not work unless it is receiving power If your networks must be active at all times it is recommended that the Switch be connected to a UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply to prevent data loss or downtime 2 In some areas installing a surge suppression device may also help protect your Managed Switch from being damaged by unregulated power surges or current to either the Switch or the power adapter Stack Ports GE DSSG 244 series There are two High Performance stack ports on the rear panel One is STX1 Cascade Down and the other is STX2 Cascade UP o When stacked the STX1 Cascade Down port should connect to the other switch s STX2 Cascade UP port and the STX2 Cascade UP port should connect to other switch s STX1 Cascade Down out o You can just use attached GE Security CB STX50 or longer st
60. received by the switch The number of EAPOL frames that have Rx Invalid Type dot1xAuthinvalidEapolFramesRx been received by the switch in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have Invalid Lengthidot1xAuthEapLengthErrorFramesRx been received by the switch in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The number of EAPOL frames of any type a Towa AOE AUER DOI Tames that have been transmitted by the switch The number of EAP initial request frames 7 PegUeSEIE S GORAU PIRSA ONEST that have been transmitted by the switch The number of valid EAP Request frames x Requests dot1xAuthEapolReqFramesTx other than initial request frames that have been transmitted by the switch RADIUS Counters RADIUS Server frame counter statistics For MAC based ports there are two tables containing RADIUS counters The left most shows a summary of all RADIUS counters on this port The right most shows RADIUS counters for the currently selected client or dashes if no client is selected or available A client can be selected from the list of authorized unauthorized clients below the two counter tables There are slight differences in the interpretation of the counters between port and MAC based authentications as shown below RADIUS Counters Dir ecti Description on dot1xAuthBackendAccessChall Port based Rx Access Challenges ENE Counts the number of times that the switch 158 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and
61. refer to the data sheet and user documentation for details For the latest product information contact your local supplier or visit us online at www gesecurity com This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment CE Gras GE Security Inc HQ and regulatory responsibility GE Security Inc 8985 Town Center Parkway Bradenton FL 34202 USA EU authorized manufacturing representative GE Security B V Kelvinstraat 7 6003 DH Weert The Netherlands 2002 96 EC WEEE directive Products marked with this symbol cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European Union For proper recycling return this product to your local supplier upon the purchase of equivalent new equipment or dispose of it at designated collection points For more information see www recyclethis info For contact information see our Web site www gesecurity
62. screen in Figure 4 125 appears Figure 4 125 Stack Information page screenshot Stack List Stack List Stack Member Switch ID Popa ee e a j Name Version Priority Time Reelect 00 30 4 76 26 93 1 GE Security GE DSSG 244 PoE Managed Switch v1 0b090925 3 0d 02 00 55 No 00 30 4 76 c4 2b 2 GE Security GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch v1 0b090925 3 No 00 30 4 24 24 24 3 GE Security GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch v1 0b090925 4 Mo 218 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete Deletes this switch from the stack configuration Stack Member The MAC address of the switch Switch ID The Switch ID 1 16 assigned to a switch For more information see description of Switch IDs Master Capable Indicates whether a switch is capable of being master An unmanaged switch for example will not be Master Capable Master Priority The priority that the switch has in the master election process The smaller the priority the more likely the switch will become master during the master election process Switch Type The product name of the switch Start Master Election By checking this option the Save operation will also start the master election process This is done by clicking Start Master Election followed by Save This causes the first two criteria to be ignored thereby basing master election o
63. service An alternative protocol is Internet Message Access Protocol IMAP IMAP provides the user with more capabilities for retaining e mail on the server and for organizing it in folders on the server IMAP can be thought of as a remote file server POP and IMAP deal with the receiving of e mail and are not to be confused with the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SMTP You send e mail with SMTP and a mail handler receives it on your recipient s behalf Then the mail is read using POP or IMAP IMAP4 and POP3 are the two most prevalent Internet standard protocols for e mail retrieval Virtually all modern e mail clients and servers support both In a private VLAN communication between ports in that private VLAN is not permitted A VLAN can be configured as a private VLAN QCE is an acronym for QoS Control Entry It describes QoS class associated with a particular QCE ID There are six QCE frame types Ethernet Type VLAN UDP TCP Port DSCP TOS and Tag Priority Frames can be classified by one of 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High for individual application QCL is an acronym for QoS Control List It is the list table of QCEs containing QoS control entries that classify to a specific QoS class on specific traffic objects Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its QCL The privileges determine specific traffic object to specific QoS class QoS is an acronym for Quality of Service It is a
64. the Internet can be useful some files can potentially save this file What s the tisk 2 Choose the file save path in management workstation Figure 4 17 File save screen Save As Contig Backup My Recent Documents Filename EET My Network Save astype AI Fies Configuration Upload This function allows backup and reload the current configuration of the Managed Switch to the local management station The screen in Figure 4 18 appears GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 59 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 18 Configuration Upload page screenshot Configuration Upload Configuration Upload 1 Click the Browse button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose saved configuration Figure 4 19 Windows file selection menu popup Save As Save in O Config Backup My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer Fie name g My Network Save as type All Files v 2 Select the configuration file then click Upload the bottom of the browser shows the upload status 3 When finished the message appears Transfer Completed 60 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Factory Default The Factory Reset button can reset the Managed Switch back to the factory default mode Be aware that the entire configuration will be reset include the IP address of the Managed
65. the ingress port to which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 through 8 Switch Select the switch to which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Switch n The ACE applies to this switch number where n is the number of the switch GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 191 Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 15 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE NOTE The System Log memory size and logging rate is limited The ACL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is rea
66. the neighbor s IP address LLDP Statistics This page provides an overview of all LLDP traffic Two types of counters are shown Global counters are counters that refer to the whole stack switch while local counters refers to counters for the currently selected switch The LLDP Statistics screen in Figure 4 1154 appears Figure 4 115 LLDP Statistics page screenshot Global Counters Neighbor enmies were last changed at 7005 10 15 Thu 05 2129 0000 1124509 see go Total Neighbors Entries Added 1 Total Neighbors Entries Deleted E Total Neighbors Entries Dropped ___ Otal Noighbors Enisios Aged Out Aifostevesh C Retesh Clear LLDP Statistics for Switch 1 Local Counters Local Port Tx Frames Rx Framec Rx Errors Frames Diccanied TLV Discarded TLV Unrecognizod Org Discarded Age Outs c 0 a i o 0 0 0 2 e 0 i 6 0 0 6 3 G 0 0 C 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 5 G c 0 0 Q 0 0 0 6 C c 0 o o D 0 0 0 10753 0 0 0 0 te a e o 0 d o o 0 cd 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 U 1 3 0 D c 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 2 c 9 0 9 c o 0 6 L a oj 0 0 0 0 0 ty u 6 o 0 0 0 0 ta 5 c c 0 o C d v 9 c 0 0 c 0 0 7 c 0 0 d 0 0 0 1B 6 c 0 0 0 0 0 Q 9 c c 0 0 c 0 0 0 20 5 0 Q 0 c o i a1 a c 0 D c Qa 0 9 22 ia c 0 0 p 9 0 6 23 6 c a o 6 0 8 24 0 0 0 0 d 6 J GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 207 Chapter 4 Web based Management Global Counters Object Description Neighbor entries were la
67. the stack port of each GE DSSG 244 series switch and power on them the stack is built automatically and the Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switch It is also easy to add or delete stackable switch to the stack without service interruption The key points of Stack management are e Identify the MASTER SWITCH e Assign re assign Switch ID for each management purpose Step 1 linking the switches by CB STX50 stack cable Step 2 Check the Master LED of each GE DSSG 244 series switch to find out the Master Switch that is elected automatically by the stack operation Step 3 Use the Web browser such as IE 6 0 to login the Master Switch the default IP address is 192 168 0 100 220 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Step 4 Choose Stack Stack Configuration from menu tree You can see the Stack had established automatically As the screen shows 1 The Switch ID is automatically assigned to the switches 2 All switches with same Priority value 3 3 The one that can t be deleted is the Stack master Figure 4 128 Stack Configuration Stack Configuration Switch Type 00 30 4f 76 26 93 1 Yes 3 GE DSSG 244 PoE GE Security GE DSSG 244 PoE Managed Switch 00 30 4 76 c4 2b 2 v Yes 3x GE DSSG 24d GE Security GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch 00 30 4 24 24 24 3 Yes 3 GE DSSG 244 GE Security GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch C Start Master Election Step 5
68. the transmission for power over Ethernet The 802 3af is delivering 48V power over RJ 45 wiring Besides 802 3af also define two types of source equipment Mid Span and End Span e Mid Span Mid Span device is placed between legacy switch and the powered device Mid Span is tap the unused wire pairs 4 5 and 7 8 to carry power the other four is for data transmit e End Span End Span device is direct connecting with power device End Span could also tap the wire 1 2 and 3 6 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 329 Chapter 8 Power Over Ethernet Overview PoE System Architecture The specification of PoE typically requires two devices the Powered Source Equipment PSE and the Powered Device PD The PSE is either an End Span or a Mid Span while the PD is a PoE enabled terminal such as IP Phones Wireless LAN etc Power can be delivered over data pairs or spare pairs of standard CAT 5 cabling How Power is Transferred Through the Cable A standard CAT5 Ethernet cable has four twisted pairs but only two of these are used for 1OBASE T and 100BASE T The specification allows two options for using these cables for power shown in Figure 8 2 and Figure 8 3 The spare pairs are used Figure 8 2 shows the pair on pins 4 and 5 connected together and forming the positive supply and the pair on pins 7 and 8 connected and forming the negative supply In fact a late change to the spec allows either polarity to be used Figure
69. these ACEs and then select the action rate limiter ID logging and shutdown Different parameter options are displayed depending on your selections IngressPort Any J Switch Any E Action Deny y Rate Limiter ID Disabled 2 Logging Disabled EJ Shutdown Disabled 9 Cancel Wizard lt Back Next gt GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 185 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Ingress Port Select the ingress port to which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 through 8 Switch Select the switch to which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Switch n The ACE applies to this switch number where n is the number of the switch Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 15 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the Sy
70. you must remove the current existing wireless network from your preferred connection first and add it in again Configure Sample EAP MD5 Authentication 1 Go to Start gt Control Panel double click on Network Connections 2 Right click on the Local Network Connection 3 Click Properties to open up the Properties setting window Figure 4 91 Status window 4 3COM 3C940 Status n General Support Connection Status Connected Duration 03 35 37 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Sent gs Received Lab 146 938 760 110 212 126 166 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management 4 Select Authentication tab 5 Select Enable network access control using IEEE 802 1X to enable 802 1x authentication 6 Select MD 5 Challenge from the drop down list box for EAP type Figure 4 92 Authentication Tab 3COM 3C940 Properties General Authentication Advanced Select this option to provide authenticated network access for Ethernet networks M Enable IEEE 802 1 authentication for this network EAP type Protected EAP PEAP Authenticate as computer when computer information is available C Authenticate as quest when user or computer information is unavailable 7 Click OK 8 When client has associated with the Managed Switch a user authentication notice appears in system tray Click on the notice to continue GE DSG 244 DSS
71. 0 to 720 minutes System Date Display the current local date and time UTC of the last SNTP request or receipt of an unsolicited message The field format is Year Month Day HH MM SS For example 2008 08 20 21 15 03 System Uptime Display the time passed since the device boot up GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 53 Chapter 4 Web based Management NOTE The device supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond A network SNTP server performs time synchronization SNTP operates only as a client and cannot provide time services to other systems NOTE It is recommended that you research any timeserver selection to ensure that it can meet your specific timeserver requirements Any NTP timeserver selection should be evaluated to determine if the server in question meets your specific timeserver requirements For more detail about the Time Server and Time Server List please refer to the following URL http ntp isc org bin view Servers WebHome http ntp isc org bin view Servers NTPPoolServers http support microsoft com kb 262680 en us Web Firmware Upgrade The Web Firmware Upgrade page contains fields for downloading system image files from the Local File browser to the device The Web Firmware Upgrade screen in Figure 4 10 appears Figure 4 10 Web Firmware Upgrade page screenshot Firmware Update 54 GE DSG
72. 000Mbps 10 100 1000 Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data Green over that port Off If L10 100 NK ACT LED light gt indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps If LNK ACT LED Off gt indicate that the port is link down Lights To indicate the port is providing 48VDC in line power PoE In Use Orange Off To indicate the connected device is not a PoE Powered Device PD 1000Base SX LX SFP interfaces Shared Port 21 Port 24 LNK ACT Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down Figure 2 6 GE DSSG 244 LED indication GE DSSG 244 beck 10 a if i i 3 t 8 Visa N i 7 IE i Adiw F aiai a z 15 F 20 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation System a Color Function pwr Green Lights to indicate that the Switch has power Lights to indicate that the Switch is the Master of the stack group STX1 Gres Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established STK Green Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established 10 100 1000Base T interfaces LED o olg Function Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps or 1000Mbps Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or rec
73. 2 When the login screen appears please enter the default username admin with password admin or the username password you have changed via console to login the main screen of Managed Switch The login screen shown in Figure 4 2 appears Default User name admin Default Password admin Figure 4 2 Login screen Connect to 192 168 0 100 FA z vy The server 192 168 0 100 at GE Security Web domain requires a username and password Warning This server is requesting that your username and password be sent in an insecure manner basic authentication without a secure connection User name i U E admin Password ecooo C Remember my password 44 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management 3 After entering the username and password the main screen appears as Figure 4 3 Figure 4 3 Web main page Renee eee ay a a FY Ye I a 7 wy nn June 7 9 2 2 2 2 2B A 9 11 13 15 GE DSG 244 System SNMP amp Port Management Link Aggregation Welcome to GE Security Spanning Tree Multicast GE DSG 244 Qos 802 1X Authentication 24 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 4 SFP Access Control List MAC Address Table Management Switch LLDP Diagnostics HELF Copyright 2009 GE Security Corporation All rights reserved 4 The Switch Menu on the left of the Web page lets you access all the commands and statistics the Switch provides Now you can use the Web
74. 232 male serial port connector It is an interface for connecting to a terminal directly Through the console port it provides rich diagnostic information includes IP Address setting factory reset port management link status and system setting Users can use the RS 232 cable in the package and connect to the console port on the device After the connection users can run any terminal 16 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation emulation program Hyper Terminal Procomm Plus Telix Winterm and so on to enter the startup screen of the device Reset Button At the left of front panel the reset button is designed for rebooting the Managed Switch without turning the power off The following is the summary table of Reset button functions About 1 3 second Reboot the Managed Switch Reset the Managed Switch to Factory Default configuration The Managed Switch will then reboot and load the default settings as below Until the PWR LED lit off Default Password admin Default IP address 192 168 0 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 Stack ID GE DSSG 244 Series only Each GE DSSG 244 series Managed Stackable Switch on a stack must have a unique Stack ID There are 16 degrees 0 9 A F in the rotary switch The Stack ID is configured via Web or CLI management interface Use the Stack ID to identify the location of the real device NOTE Stack ID is not equal to the Master Prior
75. 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management To execute a Firmware Upgrade do the following 1 Click System gt Web Firmware Upgrade 2 The Firmware Upgrade screen is displayed as in Figure 4 10 3 Click the Browse button of the main page the system would pop up the file selection menu to choose firmware 4 Select the firmware file and then click Upload the Software Upload Progress would show the file upload status 5 Once the software has been loaded to the system successfully The following screen appears Click the Please Relogin button to activate the new software immediately The system will load the new software after reboot Figure 4 11 Software successfully loaded notice screen GE DSG 244 Firmware update in progess The uploaded firmware image is being transferred to flash The system will reboot after the update Until then do not reset or power off the device Please Relogin TFTP Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade page provides the functions to allow a user to update the Managed Switch firmware from the TFTP server in the network Before updating make sure you have your TFTP server ready and the firmware image is on the TFTP server The screen in Figure 4 12 appears GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 55 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 12 TFTP Firmware Upgrade interface TFTP Firmware Update TFTP Server IP 192 168 0 52
76. 244 PoE Managed Switch E 00 30 4f 76 c4 2b 2 5 Yes 3 GE DSSG 244 GE Security GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch oo 30 s 2 24 2 3 M Yes 4m GE DSSG 244 GE Security GE DSSG 244 Managed Switch C Stan Master Election This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete Deletes this switch from the stack configuration Stack Member The MAC address of the switch Switch ID The Switch ID 1 16 assigned to a switch For more information see description of Switch IDs Master Capable Indicates whether a switch is capable of being master An unmanaged switch for example will not be Master Capable Master Priority The priority that the switch has in the master election process The smaller the priority the more likely the switch will become master during the master election process Switch Type The product name of the switch Start Master Election By checking this option the Save operation will also start the master election process This is done by clicking Start Master Election followed by Save This causes the first two criteria to be ignored thereby basing master election only on master priority and MAC address When master election is enforced the first two criteria are ignored for a period of 10 15 seconds On the Stack State Monitor web page this is shown by Reelect being set to Yes for one of the switches in the stack Stack Information This page provid
77. 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management RADIUS Counters Dir ecti on Rx Other Requests stsToSupplicant Rx Auth Successes Rx Auth Failures dotixAuthBackendAuthFails BackendResponses GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Description receives the first request from the RADIUS server following the first response from the supplicant Indicates that the RADIUS server has communication with the switch MAC based Counts all Access Challenges received from the RADIUS server for this port left most table or client right most table Port based Counts the number of times that the switch sends an EAP Request packet following the first to the dot1xAuthBackendOtherReque lsupplicant Indicates that the RADIUS server chose receives a success indication Indicates that the supplicant client has successfully authenticated to the RADIUS server Port and MAC based Counts the number of times that the switch receives a failure message This indicates that the supplicant client has not authenticated to the RADIUS server Port based Counts the number of times that the switch attempts to send a supplicant s first response packet to the RADIUS server Indicates the switch attempted communication with the RADIUS server Possible retransmissions are not counted MAC based Counts all the RADIUS packets sent from the switch towards the RADIUS server for a given port left most table o
78. 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 132 To manage the member switch 1 M GE DSSG 244 v 1 M GE DSSG 244 3 S GE DSSG 244 4 S GE DSSG 244 PoE e e e Port Management Link Aggregation VLAN Spanning Tree Multicast QoS 802 1X Authentication Access Control List MAC Address Table NOTE Slave switch IP will be covered by Master one and disappear temporarily The slave IP address can be the same as Master IP address Thus if the master switch malfunctions you can still access the other switch by same IP address NOTE If you have difficulty on selecting another switch you may be connecting to the slave switch s web please close the browser window use the arp d DOS command to clear the ARP table and then reopen the web GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 223 Chapter 4 Web based Management Power Over Ethernet Providing up to 24 PoE in line power interface the GE DS 242 PoE PoE Switch can easily build a power central controlled IP phone system IP Camera system AP group for the enterprise For instance 24 camera AP can be easily installed around the corner in the company for surveillance demands or build a wireless roaming environment in the office Without the power socket limitation the PoE Switch makes the installation of cameras or WLAN AP more easily and efficiently Figure 4 133 Power over Ethernet Status at GE DSSG 244 PoE Power Over
79. 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Policy comprises a set of rules that are applied to a network so that a network meets the needs of the business That is traffic can be prioritized across a network according to its importance to that particular business type QoS Profile consists of multiple sets of rules classifier plus service level combinations The QoS profile is assigned to a port s Rules comprises a service level and a classifier to define how the Switch will treat certain types of traffic Rules are associated with a QoS Profile see above QoS Control List Configuration This page lists the QCEs for a given QCL Frames can be classified by 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by a QoS assigned to each port A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port The QoS Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 57 appears Figure 4 57 QoS Control List Configuration page screenshot QoS Control List Configuration a ol QCE Type Type Value Traffic Class GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 121 Chapter 4 Web based Management Thi
80. 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 9 Troubleshooting This chapter contains information to help you resolve common problems If the Ethernet Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Ethernet Switch Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Check the VLAN settings trunk settings or port enabled disabled status Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half duplex then the performance will be poor Please also check the in out rate of the port Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution 1 Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch 2 Try another port on the Switch 3 Make sure the cable is installed properly GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 335 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 4 Make sure the cable is the right type 5 Turn off the power After a while turn on power again 100Base TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Switch does not power up Solution
81. 4 GE DSSG 244 PoE Using Stacking it is possible to connect a number of switches together in a stack which behaves as a single switch as seen from outside the stack Two types of stack topologies are supported e Ring topology e Chain topology same as a disconnected ring Multiple GE Security GE DSSG 244 series devices may be connected together to constitute a ring or chain stack topology using the STX 5Gbps ports as interconnect links Dedicated stacking features built into GE DSSG 244 makes all devices in the stack operate together as a single much larger switch Among the stacking features are e Hardware controlled stack wide learning and continuous automatic MAC table synchronization e Shortest path forwarding providing low latency and optimal use of stacking link bandwidth e QoS consistency across stack e Single point of management for simple stack administration e Low Cost and Flexible HDMI like Stacking cables e Real Plug and Play connectivity The following figure shows an example with five devices in a ring topology stack Each device in the stack is in a stack context called a unit The ports connecting the units are called stack ports and the ports connecting to external hosts and switches are called front ports GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 211 Chapter 4 Web based Management e Chain Stack A chain of switches that is no redundant forwarding paths Figure 4 118 Chain Stack topology
82. 44 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Default Setting Enable Example SWITCH gt port state 1 disable Port Mode Description Set or show the port speed and duplex mode Syntax Port Mode lt port_list gt 1O0hdx 10fdx 100hdx 100fdx 1000fdx auto Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 10hdx 10 Mbps half duplex 10fdx 10 Mbps full duplex 100hdx 100 Mbps half duplex 100fdx 100 Mbps full duplex 1000fdx 1 Gbps full duplex auto Auto negotiation of speed and duplex default Show configured and current mode Default Setting Auto Example Set 10Mbps half duplex speed for port1 SWITCH gt port mode 1 10hdx GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 251 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Port Flow Control Description Set or show the port flow control mode Syntax Port Flow Control lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable flow control disable Disable flow control default Show flow control mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable flow control function for port1 SWITCH gt port flow control 1 enable Port Maximum Frame Description Set or show the port maximum frame size Syntax Port MaxFrame lt port_list gt lt max_frame gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt max_frame
83. 44 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 285 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 Default Setting Low Example Set high priority for portS SWITCH gt qos default 5 high QoS Tag Priority Description Set or show the port VLAN tag priority Syntax QoS Tagprio lt port_list gt lt tag_prio gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 Default Setting 0 Example Set priority for VLAN3 SWITCH gt qos tagprio 3 7 286 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode QoS QCL Port Description Set or show the port QCL ID Syntax QoS QCL Port lt port_list gt lt qcl_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt qcl_id gt QCLID Default Setting 1 Example Set QCL ID5 for port10 SWITCH gt qos qcl port 10 5 QoS QCL Add Description Add or modify QoS Control Entry QCE If the QCE ID parameter lt qce_id gt is specified and an entry with this QCE ID already exists the QCE will be modified Otherwise a new QCE will be added If the QCE ID is not specified the next available QCE ID will be used If the next QCE ID parameter lt qce_id_next gt is specified the QCE will be placed before this QCE in the list If the next
84. 44 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 97 Chapter 4 Web based Management In cases where a given service VLAN only has two member ports on the switch the learning can be disabled for the particular VLAN and can therefore rely on flooding as the forwarding mechanism between the two ports This way the MAC table requirements are reduced VLAN Port Configuration The VLAN Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 46 appears Figure 4 46 VLAN Port Configuration page screenshot 802 10 Tag 802 10 Tag 802 10 Tag 802 10 Tag 802 10 Tag 2 10 Tog 802 10 Tag 4 802 10 Tag 802 10 Tag 802 10 Tag 4 LELLELULLLLI 000o 0 a aa aoa a a a e o e a a o a m aoa 1 2 3 4 5 6 J 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 98 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Port This is the logical port number for this row PVID Allow assign PVID for selected port The range for the PVID is 1 4094 The PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port The PVID must as same as the VLAN ID that the port belong to VLAN group or the untagged traffic will be dropped Ingress Filtering Enable ingress filtering for a port by checking the box This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If ingress filtering is enabled and the ingress port is not a member of the classi
85. 8 00 x 18 00 v Refresh GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 233 Chapter 4 Web based Management 234 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Accessing the CLI When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection to the server s console port or via a Telnet connection the switch can be managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch s command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface CLI Logon to the Console Once the terminal has connected to the device power on the GE DSG GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch the terminal will display that it is running testing procedures Then the following message asks the login password The factory default password as following and the login screen in Figure 5 1 appears Password admin GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 235 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Figure 5 1 GE DSG GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch Console Login screen COM1_115200 HyperTerminal Bile Edit View Cal Transfer Help D s3 oo e Bootloader v1 0 built Aug 2008 IRAH x60080000 0x04000000 PLASI 9x80000000 Ox80800000 256 blocks of 0x00010000 bytes each memtest Testing 0x0002c340 0x0I3fe1000 Completed no errors fis load mana
86. 8 1 Power Supplied over the Spare Pins POWER SOURCING POWERED DEVICE EQUIPMENT PSE PD SPARE PAIR The data pairs are used Since Ethernet pairs are transformer coupled at each end it is possible to apply DC power to the center tap of the isolation transformer without upsetting the data transfer In this mode of operation the pair on pins 3 and 6 and the pair on pins 1 and 2 can be of either polarity 330 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 8 Power Over Ethernet Overview Figure 8 2 Power Supplied over the Data Pins POWER SOURCING POWERED DEVICE EQUIPMENT PSE PD SPARE PAIR When should you install PoE Consider the following scenarios e You re planning to install the latest VoIP Phone system to minimize cabling building costs when your company moves into new offices next month e The company staff has been clamoring for a wireless access point in the picnic area behind the building so they can work on their laptops through lunch but the cost of electrical power to the outside is not affordable e Management asks for IP Surveillance Cameras and business access systems throughout the facility but they would rather avoid another electrician s payment References IEEE Std 802 3af 2003 Amendment to IEEE Std 802 3 2002 including IEEE Std 802 3ae 2002 2003 Page s 0_1 121 White Paper on Power over Ethernet IEEE802 3af http www poweroverethernet com articles php article_id 52 Microsemi
87. 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled 802 1X Disabled _ 802 1X Disabled Auto refresh lE FES RS IIS eo io ato mia w IRD to 3 im RBRB ISI This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The switch port number Click to navigate to detailed 802 1X statistics for this port State The current state of the port Refer to IEEE 802 1X Port State for a description of the individual states Last Source The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame for port based authentication and the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication Last ID 156 The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Resp ID EAPOL frame for port based authentication and the source MAC address from the most recently received frame from a new client for MAC based authentication GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication Statistics This page provides detailed IEEE 802 1X statistics for a specific switch port running port based authentication For MAC based ports it shows selected RADIUS statistics only Use the port select box to select which port details to be displayed The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication Statistics scre
88. ACP Static Trunk Support 12 groups of 16 Port trunk support Traffic classification based Strict priority and WRR 4 level priority for switching Port Number 802 1p priority DS TOS field in IP Packet ree IGMP v1 v2 Snooping up to 8K multicast Groups noopin One IGMP Querier mode support 10 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction IP Based ACL MAC Based ACL Up to 256 entries RFC 1213 MIB II IF MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 1643 Ethernet MIB RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 Ether Like MIB RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB RFC 2933 IGMP STD MIB RFC3411 SNMP Frameworks MIB IEEE802 1X PAE LLDP MAU MIB Power over Ethernet ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION Model GE DSG 244 GE DSSG 244 PoE GE DSSG 244 AC Power Input Voltage 100 240VAC 50 60Hz Auto sensing Power Consumption 110V 22 2 Watts 75 7 BTU 29 3 Watts 99 9 BTU 15 5 Watts System on 220V 23Watts 78 43 BTU 30 2 Watts 102 98 BTU 16 Watts Power Consumption 110V 29 3 Watts 100 BTU 39 Watts 132 99 BTU 46 Watts Full Load 220V 30 2 Watts 102 98 BTU 40 Watts 136 4 BTU 45 5 Watts Power Consumption 110V __ Max 290 Watts 988 9 BTU PoE Full Load 220V Max 288 Watts 982 BTU ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATION Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Storage Temperature Relative Humidity 0 C 50 degree C 20 95
89. AN the VLAN groups allowed on the Managed Switch will be maximally up to 255 Via supporting port aggregation the Managed Switch allows the operation of a high speed trunk combining multiple ports up to eight groups of maximum to 8 ports for trunking and it supports fail over as well Excellent Traffic Control GE Security GE DSG 244 GE DSSG 244 series is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by telecoms The functionality includes QoS features such as wire speed Layer 4 traffic classifiers and bandwidth limiting that are particular useful for multi tenant unit multi business unit Telco or Network Service Provide applications It also empowers the enterprises to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantees the best performance at VoIP and Video conferencing transmission Efficient Management For efficient management the series of Managed Switches is equipped with console WEB and SNMP management interfaces With its built in Web based management it offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The Managed Switch supports standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and can be managed via any standard based management software For text based management it can also be accessed via Telnet and the console port GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 3 Chapter 1 Introduction Powerful Security The Managed Switch off
90. All ports lt command gt The command parameter takes the following values clear Clear port statistics packets Show packet statistics bytes Show byte statistics errors Show error statistics discards Show discard statistics filtered Show filtered statistics low Show low priority statistics normal Show normal priority statistics medium Show medium priority statistics high Show high priority statistics default Show all port statistics 254 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Port VeriPHY Description Run cable diagnostics Syntax Port VeriPHY lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Port Numbers Description Show port numbering Syntax Port Numbers Mirror Configuration Description Show mirror configuration Syntax Mirror Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Mirror Port Description Set or show the mirror port Syntax Mirror Port lt port gt disable Parameters lt port gt disable Mirror port or disable default Show port GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode 255 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Default Setting Disable Mirror SID Description Set or show the mirror switch ID Syntax Mirror SID lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 Default Setting 1
91. Base FX Speed Display the spedd of current SFP module the speed value or description is get from the SFP module Different vendors SFP modules might show different speed information Wave Lengthinm Display the wavelength of current SFP module the wavelength value is get from the SFP module Use this column to check if the wavelength values of two nodes are the matched while the fiber connection is failed Distance m Display the supports distance of current SFP module the distance value is getting from the SFP module GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 81 Chapter 4 Web based Management Link Aggregation Port Aggregation optimizes port usage by linking a group of ports together to form a single Link Aggregated Groups LAGs Port Aggregation multiplies the bandwidth between the devices increases port flexibility and provides link redundancy Each LAG is composed of ports of the same speed set to full duplex operations Ports in a LAG can be of different media types UTP Fiber or different fiber types provided they operate at the same speed Aggregated Links can be assigned manually Port Trunk or automatically by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP on the relevant links Aggregated Links are treated by the system as a single logical port Specifically the Aggregated Link has similar port attributes to a non aggregated port including auto negotiation speed Duplex setting etc The
92. Chapter 4 Web based Management The Port Mirror Configuration screen in Figure 4 35 and Figure 4 36 appears e GE DSG Standalone Switch Figure 4 35 Port Mirror Configuration page screenshot Port Mirror Configuration Stack Global Settings Bert Switch t mirrer te fomirrerte Orsabled 3 Mirror Port Configuration for Switch 1 This page includes the following fields Port Mode i Disabled 2 Disabled 3 Disabled Object Description Port to mirror to Frames from ports that have either source or destination mirroring enabled are mirrored to this port Disabled disables mirroring Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Mode Select mirror mode Rx only Frames received at this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames transmitted are not mirrored Tx only Frames transmitted from this port are mirrored to the mirroring port Frames received are not mirrored Disabled Neither frames transmitted nor frames received are mirrored Enabled Frames received and frames transmitted are GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual mirrored to the mirror port 79 Chapter 4 Web based Management GE DSSG 244 series Stackable Switch The GE DSSG 244 series Stackable switch supports port mirror function over stack switch Figure 4 36 Port Mirror Configuration page screenshot Port Mirror Configuration Stack Global Settings Bort to mirror to Pot 1 iy Switch t
93. Chassis 10 Port SSIDESSCEISSERS LLDP Neighbor Information for Switch 1 Remote Pert 1D systam Mame Port Description Syste Capabilities annpernent addrens Wirtond WS9CE40 PI Fast COLL 03060204 ENM AENT Ethemet Adapter Packet Staden Ore IDLLZIT Prs Schedaar hiniga Adocetesn C The columns hold the following information Object Description Local Port The port on which the LLDP frame was received Chassis ID The Chassis ID is the identification of the neighbor s LLDP frames Remote Port ID The Remote Port ID is the identification of the neighbor port System Name System Name is the name advertised by the neighbor unit Port Description Port Description is the port description advertised by the neighbor unit System Capabilities System Capabilities describes the neighbor unit s capabilities The possible capabilities are 1 Other 2 Repeater 3 Bridge 4 WLAN Access Point 5 Router 6 Telephone 7 DOCSIS cable device 8 Station only 206 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description 9 Reserved When a capability is enabled the capability is followed by If the capability is disabled the capability is followed by Management Address Management Address is the neighbor unit s address that is used for higher layer entities to assist the discovery by the network management This could for instance hold
94. Connect the Managed Switch to network devices A Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 1000 RJ 45 ports on the front of the Managed Switch B Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc Step 5 Connect the Managed Switch to supply power A Connect socket end of the power cable to the socket on the Managed Switch rear panel B Connect the power cable plug to a standard wall outlet C Switch the power switch on the rear panel to ON When the Managed Switch receives power the Power LED should light and remain solid Green Rack mount Installation Use the following instructions to install the Managed Switch in a 19 inch standard rack Step 1 Place the Managed Switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front CAUTION Use only the screws supplied with the mounting brackets Damage caused by using incorrect screws will invalidate the warranty Step 2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the Managed Switch Use the supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 12 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the Managed Switch GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 25 Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2 12 Attaching rack mount brackets to the GE DSG 244 Hnn e S gt aallt alein a o T Step 3 Secure the brackets tightly but do not over tighten screws Step 4 Follow
95. DoS attack To continue click Next This page includes the following fields Object Description Set up Policy Rules Set up the default policy rules for Client ports Server ports Network ports and Guest ports Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different ACL policies Set up Typical Network Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application Application Rules access control Set up Source MAC and ___ Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames Source IP Binding that match the source IP and source MAC on specific port Set up DoS Attack Set up the specific ACL to detect DoS attack Detection Rules GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 181 Chapter 4 Web based Management Set up Policy Rules Set up the default policy rules for Client ports Server ports Network ports and Guest ports Policy 2 for client ports Limit the allowed rate of broadcast and multicast frames Policy 3 for server ports Common server access only DHCP FTP Mail and WEB server Policy 4 for network ports Limit the allowed rate of TCP SYN flooding and ICMP flooding Policy 5 for guest ports Internet access only The screen in Figure 4 97 appears Figure 4 97 Set up Policy Rules page screenshot Set up Policy Rules Set up the default policy rules for Client ports Server ports Network ports and Guest ports Policy 2 for client ports Limit the a
96. E User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward Figure 4 50 Before Applying the STA Rules D Ani _ Portcast 19 Bridge 10 15 ee Portcast 4 Portcast 4 Portcast 4 Portcast 4 B c Brigg ID 30 Bridge 1D 20 Portcast 19 Portcast 19 3a AN _ gt 3a LAn gt In this example only the default STP values are used Figure 4 51 After Applying the STA Rules A Root Bridge Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port C Designated Bridge ze Jt i An2 _ gt 3 ai An _ GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 111 Chapter 4 Web based Management The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 4 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 19 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link RSTP System Configuration This pa
97. Example Set mirror SID 2 for switch SWITCH gt mirror sid 2 Mirror Mode Description Set or show the mirror mode Syntax Mirror Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable Rx and Tx mirroring disable Disable Mirroring rx Enable Rx mirroring tx Enable Tx mirroring default Show mirror mode 256 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable mirror mode for port20 SWITCH gt mirror mode 20 enable GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 257 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Link Aggregation Command Aggregation Configuration Description Show link aggregation configuration Syntax Aggr Configuration Example SWITCH gt aggr configuration Aggregation Mode SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled P Enabled Port Enabled Aggregation Add Description Add or modify link aggregation Syntax Aggr Add lt port_list gt lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Default Setting Disable Example Add port 1 4 in Group1 SWITCH gt aggr add 1 4 1 258 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Aggregation Delete Description Delete link aggregation Syntax Aggr Delete lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr
98. Filter Specify the Ethernet type filter for this ACE Any No EtherType filter is specified EtherType filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific EtherType filter with this ACE you can enter a specific EtherType value A field for entering a EtherType value appears Ethernet Type Value 180 When Specific is selected for the EtherType filter you can enter a specific EtherType value The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF A frame that hits this ACE matches this EtherType value GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management ACL Configuration wizard This handy wizard helps you set up an ACL quickly The ACL Configuration wizard screen in Figure 4 96 appears Figure 4 96 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot Welcome to the ACL Configuration Wizard Please select an action O Set up Policy Rules Set up the default policy rules for Client ports Server ports Network ports and Guest ports Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different ACL policies Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control Setup Source MAC and Source IP Binding Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames that match the source MAC and source IP on specific ports Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules Set up the specific ACL to detect
99. G 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management 4 The shared secret key should be as same as the key configured on the Managed Switch Figure 4 86 Windows Server add new RADIUS client setting iNew RADIUS Client Cli RADIUS Standard ha Confirm shared secret J Request must contain ti 5 Configure ports attribute of 802 1x the same as 802 1 Port Configuration Figure 4 87 802 1x Port Configuration 802 1X Disabled _ 1536 __Reauthenticae J Remitisize Aathorzed E OaD S IT e e 802 1 Disabled RA 153 802 1X Disabled i if i SSES 2S wv MN MH BUN 8 Authorizes Autnorzes E Authorized Ashorzes E Authorized GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 163 Chapter 4 Web based Management 6 Create user data The establishment of the user data needs to be created on the Radius Server PC For example the Radius Server founded on Win2003 Server and then Figure 4 88 Windows 2003 AD server setting path 23 Active Directory Domains and Trusts iB Adis ak Distributed Fie system Sb Printers SA ONS fh Domain Controller Security Policy te an Domain Security Policy K Event Viewer Internet Authentication Service E4 Internet Information Services 115 Manager WE Accessories Manage Your Server JD intenet Egon
100. G 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Audio and Video Indicates the common servers that apply to the specific QCE The common servers are QuickTime 4 Server MSN Messenger Phone Yahoo Messenger Phone Napster Real Audio Games ndicates the common games that apply to the specific QCE User Definition ndicates the user definition that applies to the specific QCE The user definitions are Ethernet Type Specify the Ethernet Type filter for this QCE The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF VLAN ID VLAN ID filter for this QCE The allowed range is 1 to 4095 UDP TCP Port Specify the TCP UDP port filter for this QCE The allowed range is 0 to 65535 DSCP Specify the DSCP filter for this QCE The allowed range is 0 to 63 Buttons Cancel Wizard Click to cancel the wizard lt Back Click to go back to the previous wizard step Next gt Click to continue the wizard STEP 2 According to your selection on the previous page this wizard will create specific QCEs QoS Control Entries automatically First select the QCL ID for these QCEs and then select the traffic class Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 129 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 63 Set up Typical Network Application Rules page 2 screenshot
101. G 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 167 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 93 Windows client popup login request message i Local Area Connection 3 x Click here to enter your user name and password For he network 10 19 PM 9 Enter the user name password and the logon domain that your account belongs 10 Click OK to complete the validation process Figure 4 94 Domain Logon window Local Area Connection 3 User name test Password eseseese00 sid Logon domain a 168 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Access Control Lists ACL is an acronym for Access Control List It is the list table of ACEs containing access control entries that specify individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situations In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls ACE is an acronym for Access Control Entry It de
102. GE Security GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Copyright Disclaimer Trademarks and patents Intended use FCC compliance Regulatory information Manufacturer European Union directives Contact information 2010 GE Security Inc This document may not be copied in whole or in part or otherwise reproduced without prior written consent from GE Security Inc except where specifically permitted under US and international copyright law The information in this document is subject to change without notice GE Security Inc GE Security assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies or omissions and specifically disclaims any liabilities losses or risks personal or otherwise incurred as a consequence directly or indirectly of the use or application of any of the contents of this document For the latest documentation contact your local supplier or visit us online at www gesecurity com This publication may contain examples of screen captures and reports used in daily operations Examples may include fictitious names of individuals and companies Any similarity to names and addresses of actual businesses or persons is entirely coincidental GE and the GE monogram are trademarks of General Electric Company Other trade names used in this document may be trademarks or registered trademarks of the manufacturers or vendors of the respective products Use this product only for the purpose it was designed for
103. ITCH gt dot1x secret 123abc Dotix Authenticate Description Refresh restart 802 1X authentication process Syntax Dot1x Authenticate lt port_list gt now Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports now Force reauthentication immediately Dotix Re authentication Description Set or show Reauthentication mode Syntax Dot1x Reauthentication enable disable Parameters enable Enable reauthentication disable Disable reauthentication default Show reauthentication mode Default Setting Disable GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 297 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Enable re authentication function SWITCH gt dot1x reauthentication enable Dot1x Period Description Set or show the period between reauthentications Syntax Dot1x Period lt reauth_period gt Parameters lt reauth_period gt Period between reauthentications 1 3600 seconds default Show reauthentication period Default Setting 3600 Example Set period re authentication time in 3000 seconds SWITCH gt dot1x period 3000 Dot1x Timeout Description Set or show the time between EAPOL retransmissions Syntax Dot1x Timeout lt eapol_timeout gt Parameters lt eapol_timeout gt Time between EAPOL retransmissions 1 255 seconds default Show retransmission timeout 298 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Default Setting
104. LED is Off it indicates that the port is link down 18 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation 1000Base SX LX SFP interfaces Shared Port 21 Port 24 LED Color Function Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully 1000 established with speed 1000Mbps with Gigabit SFP transceiver or 100Mbps with 100Base FX SFP transceiver Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down LNK Figure 2 5 GE DSSG 244 PoE LED indication GE DS5G 244 PoE Sack ID SAIE oT 1 Master amp React FWE Color Function Lights to indicate that the Switch is powered on reen Blink to indicate the System is running under booting procedure Lights to indicate that the Switch is the Master of the stack group STX1 Green Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established STX2 Cicin Lights to indicate the stacking link through that port is successfully established Alert a Color Function PWR Alert Lights to indicate that the power supply failure FAN1 Alert Lights to indicate that the FAN1 failure FAN2 Alert Lights to indicate that the FAN2 failure FAN3 Alert Lights to indicate that the FAN3 failure GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 19 Chapter 2 Installation 10 100 1000Base T interfaces LED Color Function Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps or 1
105. LLDP information transmitted Sys Name Optional TLV When checked the system name is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Descr Optional TLV When checked the system description is included in LLDP information transmitted Sys Capa Optional TLV When checked the system capability is included in LLDP information transmitted The system capabilities identifies the primary function s of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled The information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802 1AB Mgmt Addr Optional TLV When checked the management address is included in LLDP information transmitted The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the switch If no management address is available the address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement The management address TLV may also include information about the specific interface associated with this address and an object identifier indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 205 Chapter 4 Web based Management LLDP Neighbor This page provides a status overview for all LLDP neighbors The displayed table contains a row for each port on which an LLDP neighbor is detected The LLDP Neighbor screen in Figure 4 114 appears Figure 4 114 LLDP Neighbor Information page screenshot lecal port
106. MP echo Syntax IP Ping lt ip_addr gt lt ping_length gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt _ IP host address a b c d lt ping_length gt Ping data length 8 1400 excluding MAC IP and ICMP headers Example SWITCH gt ip ping 192 168 0 51 PING server 192 168 0 51 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 0 time Oms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 1 time Oms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 2 time 10ms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 3 time Oms 60 bytes from 192 168 0 51 icmp_seq 4 time Oms Sent 5 packets received 5 OK 0 bad GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 249 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Port Management Command Port Configuration Description Show port configuration Syntax Port Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Display port1 4 status SWITCH gt port configuration 1 4 Port State Mode Flow Control MaxFrame Power Excessive Link Enabled Auto Disabled Enabled Discard Enabled Auto Disabled Enabled Discard Enabled Auto Disabled Enabled Discard Enabled Auto Disabled Enabled Discard 100fdx port state Description Set or show the port administrative state Syntax Port State lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable port disable Disable port default Show administrative mode 250 GE DSG 2
107. N tagging Port Overlapping Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly shared network resources among different VLAN groups such as file servers or printers Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap but still need to communicate you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch 94 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Untagged VLANs Untagged or static VLANs are typically used to reduce broadcast traffic and to increase security A group of network users assigned to a VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the switch Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same VLAN Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets VLAN Basic Information The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type supported by the Managed Switch The VLAN Basic Information screen in Figure 4 51 appears Figure 4 45 VLAN Basic Information page screenshot VLAN Basic Information for Switch 1 VLAN Mode IEEE 802 10 Maximum VLAN ID 4034 Maximum Number of Supported VLANs 255 ___ Current Number of VLANs 1 VLAN Learning VL Configurable PVID Tagging Yes This page includes the following fields Object Description VLAN Mode Display the current VLAN mode used by this Managed Switch Port Based GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 95 C
108. P source value TCP UDP Destination Filter Specify the TCP UDP destination filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP destination filter is specified TCP UDP destination filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears Range If you want to filter a specific range TCP UDP destination filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value A field for entering a TCP UDP destination value appears 178 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Object Chapter 4 Web based Management Description TCP UDP Destination Number When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination value The allowed range is O to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value TCP UDP Destination Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP destination filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP destination range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP destination value TCP FIN Specify the TCP No more data from sender FIN value for this ACE 0 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must not be able to match this entry 1 TCP frames where the FIN field is set must be able to match this
109. Pin Assignment Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 1000Mbps 1000Base T Contact MDI MDI X 1 BI_DA BI_DB 2 BI_DA BI_DB 3 BI_DB BI_DA 4 BI_DC BI_DD 5 BI_DC BI_DD 6 BI_DB BI_DA 7 BI_DD BI_DC 8 BI_DD BI_DC Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 339 Appendix A RJ 45 Pin Assignment 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments Contact MDI MDI X Media Dependant Interface Media Dependant Interface Cross Not used 45 The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment 2345678 The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection 340 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable Appendix A RJ 45 Pin Assignment
110. QCE ID is not specified the QCE will be placed last in the list Syntax QoS QCL Add lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt lt qce_id_next gt etype lt etype gt vid lt vid gt port lt udp_tcp_port gt dscp lt dscp gt tos lt tos_list gt tag_prio lt tag_prio_list gt GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 287 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode lt class gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCLID lt qce_id gt QCEID 1 24 lt qce_id_next gt Next QCE ID 1 24 etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type vid VLAN ID keyword lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 port UDP TCP port keyword lt udp_tcp_port gt Source or destination UDP TCP port 0 65535 dscp IP DSCP keyword lt dscp gt IP DSCP 0 63 tos IP ToS keyword lt tos_list gt IP ToS list 0 7 tag_prio VLAN tag priority keyword lt tag_prio_list gt VLAN tag priority list 0 7 lt class gt __ Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 QoS QCL Delete Description Delete QCE Syntax QoS QCL Delete lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 288 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode QoS QCL Lookup Description Lookup QCE Syntax QoS QCL Lookup lt qcl_id gt lt qce_id gt Parameters lt qcl_id gt QCL ID lt qce_id gt QCE ID 1 24 QoS Mode Description Set or show the p
111. SG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 77 Chapter 4 Web based Management Receive Error Counters Object Description Tx Drops The number of frames dropped due to output buffer congestion Tx Late Exc Coll The number of frames dropped due to excessive or late collisions Port Mirroring Configuration Configure port Mirroring on this page This function provide to monitoring network traffic that forwards a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port of a network Switch to another port where the packet can be studied It enables the manager to keep close track of switch performance and alter it if necessary e To debug network problems selected traffic can be copied or mirrored to a mirror port where a frame analyzer can be attached to analyze the frame flow e The Managed Switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a monitor port You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity Figure 4 34 Port Mirror application Port Mirroring Link Target Port Monitor Client With Ethereal or SnifferPor The traffic to be copied to the mirror port is selected as follows e All frames received on a given port also known as ingress or source mirroring e All frames transmitted on a given port also known as egress or destination mirroring 78 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Mirror Port Configuration
112. SSG 244 Series Managed Switch but without the expensive up front cost Advanced Features and Centralized Power Management for Enterprise and Campus PoE Networking PoE Model The GE Security GE DSSG 244 POE series PoE Switch provides 24 10 100 1000Mbps Power over Ethernet PoE IEEE 802 3af compliant ports which optimize the installation and power management of network devices such as wireless access points AP Voice over IP VoIP phones and security video cameras The PoE capabilities also help to reduce deployment costs for network devices like the wireless AP as a result of freeing from restrictions of power outlet locations Power and data switching are integrated into one unit and delivered over a single cable It thus eliminates cost for additional AC wiring and reduces installation time Fiber Optical Long Reach Networking GE DSSG 244 To fulfill the needs of a large scale of network deployment applications the GE DSSG 244 provides 24 100 1000 dual speed SFP slots 8 shared Gigabit TP ports and 2 dedicated High Speed HDMI like interfaces for stacking with the series of switches By applying the GE DSSG series Switch up to 16 units 384 fiber optical ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports and functionality as needed The 2 built in stacking ports providing 5Gbps bandwidth and up to 20Gbps Bi 4 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction directional speed and it can handle extr
113. Switch Once the Factory Reset item is pressed the screen in Figure 4 20 appears Figure 4 20 Factory Default Reset screen Factory Default Are you sure you want to reset the configuration to Factory Defaults Yes After the Factory button is pressed and rebooted the system will load the default IP settings as following e Default IP address 192 168 0 100 e Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 e Default Gateway 192 168 0 254 e The other settings have been rest back to disable or none NOTE To reset the Managed Switch to the Factory default setting you can also press the hardware reset button at the front panel about 10 seconds After the device be rebooted You can login the management WEB interface within the same subnet of 192 168 0 xx GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 61 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 21 Hardware Rest Button GE DS 244 Loreal E TE A oa Hardware Reset Button System Reboot The Reboot page enables the device to be rebooted from a remote location Once the Reboot button is pressed user have to re login to the WEB interface about 60 seconds later the screen in Figure 4 22 appears Figure 4 22 System Reboot page screenshot System Reboot Are you sure you want to perform a System Reboot You can also check the SYS LED at the front panel to identify the System is load completely or not If the SYS LED is blinking then it is in the firmware load stage i
114. The screen in Figure 4 104 appears Figure 4 104 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules page screenshot Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules Set up the specific ACL to detect DoS attack by selecting the attack type for your rule O UDP DoS Fraggle A malicious attacker sending a large number of UDP packets with random ports to the target system ICMP DoS Ping of Death A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet larger than the 65 536 bytes to the target system CO ICMP DoS Smurf A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet with broadcast destination addresses to the target system Cancel Wizard lt Back Next gt This page includes the following fields Object Description UDP DoS Fraggle A malicious attacker sending a large number of UDP packets with random ports to the target system When the target system receives these packets it will determine what application is waiting on the destination port When it realizes that there is no application that is waiting on the port it will generate an ICMP packet of destination unreachable to the spoofed source address Eventually leading it to be unreachable by other clients and the system will go down ICMP DoS Ping of A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet Death larger than the 65 536 bytes to the target system Some target systems cannot handle the packet larger than the maximum IP packet size which often causes tar
115. User Manual Provide the timezone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 720 to 720 minutes 51 Chapter 4 Web based Management Buttons Click SAVE to save changes Click RESET to undo any changes made locally and revert to previously saved values User Authentication This page allows you to configure the system password required to access the web pages or log in from CLI After setup completed please press Save button to take effect Please login to the web interface with new password the screen in Figure 4 8 appears Figure 4 8 IP configuration interface User Authentication Old Password ___New Password Confirm New Password This page includes the following fields Object Description Old Password Enter the current system password If this is incorrect the new password will not be set New Password The system password The allowed string length is 0 to 31 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 32 to 126 It will not display as it is typed only asterisks will show Passwords are alphanumeric characters in length and are case sensitive Confirm New The new password must be entered twice to catch typing errors To Password confirm that you entered it correctly this field will not display but will show asterisks 52 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management NOTE Aft
116. User Manual 175 Chapter 4 Web based Management IP Parameters The IP parameters can be configured when Frame Type IPv4 is selected Object Description IP Protocol Filter Specify the IP protocol filter for this ACE Any No IP protocol filter is specified don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific IP protocol filter with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an IP protocol filter appears ICMP Select ICMP to filter IPv4 ICMP protocol frames Extra fields for defining ICMP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file UDP Select UDP to filter IPv4 UDP protocol frames Extra fields for defining UDP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file TCP Select TCP to filter IPv4 TCP protocol frames Extra fields for defining TCP parameters will appear These fields are explained later in this help file IP Protocol Value When Specific is selected for the IP protocol value you can enter a specific value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this IP protocol value IP TTL Specify the Time to Live settings for this ACE zero IPv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must not be able to match this entry non zero IPv4 frames with a Time to Live field greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Fragment Specify t
117. _id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Example Delete Group2 SWITCH gt aggr delete 2 Aggregation Lookup Description Lookup link aggregation Syntax Aggr Lookup lt aggr_id gt Parameters lt aggr_id gt Aggregation ID global 1 2 local 3 14 Example Show aggregation status SWITCH gt aggr lookup 1 GLAG1 Static 1 4 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 259 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Aggregation Mode Description Set or show the link aggregation traffic distribution mode Syntax Aggr Mode smac dmaclip port enable disable Parameters smac Source MAC address dmac Destination MAC address ip Source and destination IP address port Source and destination UDP TCP port enable Enable field in traffic distribution disable Disable field in traffic distribution Default Setting SMAC Enabled DMAC Disabled IP Enabled Port Enabled Example Disable SMAC mode SWITCH gt Aggr mode smac disable LACP Configuration Description Show LACP configuration Syntax LACP Configuration lt port_list gt 260 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show LACP configuration GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 261 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode LACP Mode Description Set or show LACP mode Syntax LACP Mode lt port_li
118. able with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address have been seen after a configurable age time MAC Address Table Configuration The MAC Address Table is configured on this page Set timeouts for entries in the dynamic MAC Table and configure the static MAC table here The MAC Address Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 109 appears Figure 4 109 MAC Address Table Configuration page screenshot ACL Ports Configuration for Switch 1 1 16 Deny D Disabled J Disabled FJ Disabled J Disabled J 0 2 ME Permit Disabled d Disabled d Disabled J Disabled 3 0 3 nE Permit Disabled amp Disabled Disabled ky Disabled by 0 4 1 Permit Disabled Disabled g Disabled Disabled 0 5 18 Permit A Disabled Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J 0 6 1 Permit g Disabled J Disabled FJ Disabled J Disabled E 0 7 1 Permit amp Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Disabled 8750 8 16 Permit Disabled _ Disabled Disabled Disabled K 213 9 mE Permit Disabled Disabled J Disabled J Disabled K3 0 10 1 Pem Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Disabled EJ 0 1 1 Permit g Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J 0 12 1 Permit E Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J 0 13 m Permit Disabled amp Disabled A Disabled J Disabled K3 0 14 1 Permit Disabled J D
119. ack cable CB STX200 connector to stack o The CB STX50 and CB STX200 are Cross overed HDMI cables only attached GE Security stack cable can be used o Plug and play connection Figure 2 10 GE DSSG 244 Stack Ports Carada aren Caicedo Lip GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 23 Chapter 2 Installation Switch Installation This section describes how to install your Managed Switch and make connections Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented To install your Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf simply complete the following steps Desktop Installation Use the following steps to install the Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf Step 1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the Managed Switch Step 2 Place the Managed Switch on a desktop or shelf near an AC power source as shown in Figure 2 11 Step 3 Ensure there is enough ventilation space between the Managed Switch and surrounding objects Figure 2 11 Typical placement of GE DSG 244 on desktop 24 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation NOTE When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 1 Features and Product Specifications Connection to the Managed Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more information please refer to the Cabling Specification section Step 4
120. ack the product in case there is a need to return it Product Description High Performance Cost effective Telecom class Gigabit solution for Enterprise backbone and Data Center Networking The GE Security Managed Switch is a L2 L4 Managed Gigabit Switch Since Gigabit network interface had become the basic equipment and requirement of Enterprise and Network Servers with 48Gbps switching fabric the Managed Switch can handle extremely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking to a backbone or high capacity servers The powerful QoS and Network Security features meet the needs of effective data traffic control for Campus and Enterprise such VoIP video streaming and multicast application 2 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction High Performance The Managed Switch provides 24 10 100 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports with 4 shared Gigabit SFP slots It boasts a high performance switch architecture that is capable of providing non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 48Gbps which greatly simplifies the tasks of upgrading the LAN for catering to increasing bandwidth demands Robust Layer 2 Features The Managed Switch can be programmed for basic switch management functions such as port speed configuration Port aggregation VLAN Spanning Tree protocol QoS bandwidth control and IGMP Snooping The Managed Switch provides 802 10 Tagged VLAN Q in Q VLAN trunning and private VL
121. action Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control Setup ToS Precedence Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the user priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets To continue click Next This page includes the following fields Object Description Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies Set up Typical Network Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application Application Rules quality control Set up ToS Precedence Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 Mapping bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets Set up VLAN Tag Priority Set up the traffic class mapping to the User Priority value 3 bits Mapping when receiving VLAN tagged packets 126 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Set up Policy Rules Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen in Figure 4 61 appears Figure 4 61 Set up Policy Rules page screenshot Set up Policy Ru
122. age header The ACL Ports Configuration screen in Figure 4 108 appears Figure 4 108 ACL Ports Configuration page screenshot oO mE ng T a 1 T E 1G 1 T 18 T TE T 1 E Tg g nE ACL Ports Configuration for Switch 1 Disabled J Disabled Disabled J Disabled 3 Permit Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Permit Disabled J Disabled J Disabled KJ Disabled Permit Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Disabled Permit ha Disabled Permit Disabled Permi Disabled M Permit Disabled J Permit Disabled Disabled Disabled EJ Disabled EJ Disabled Disabled Disabled 9 Disabled 9 Disabled Disabled J Disabled 9 Disabled J Disabled 9 Disabled 9 Disabled Disabled g CH F E P H P E 7 H 7 E P E F This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Policy ID Select the policy to apply to this port The allowed values are 1 through 8 The default value is 1 Action Select whether forwarding is permitted Permit or denied Deny The default value is Permit Rate Limiter ID Select which rate limiter to apply to this port The allowed values are Disabled or the values 1 through 15 The default value is Disabled 194 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Descriptio
123. agement architecture It enables network management systems to learn network problems by receiving traps or change notices from network devices implementing SNMP SNTP is an acronym for Simple Network Time Protocol a network protocol for synchronizing the clocks of computer systems SNTP uses UDP datagrams as transport layer Stack Protocol using ROUting Technology An advanced protocol for almost instantaneous discovery of topology changes within a stack as well as election of a master switch SPROUT also calculates parameters for setting up each switch to perform shortest path forwarding within the stack 350 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Appendix B Glossary Term STP Switch ID T Tag Priority TCP TELNET TFTP ToS TLV Definition Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI layer 2 protocol which ensures a loop free topology for any bridged LAN The original STP protocol is now obsolete by RSTP Switch IDs 1 16 are used to uniquely identify the switches within a stack The Switch ID of each switch is shown on the display on the front of the switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands Tag Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 19 frame TCP is an acronym for Transmission Control Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers The TCP protocol guarantees reliab
124. al 333 Chapter 8 Power Over Ethernet Overview utilizing 48 VDC then inadvertently plugging the powered Ethernet cable into a non PoE notebook computer What s sure to follow is not a pretty picture The standard defines two means of disconnection DC Disconnect and AC Disconnect both of which provide the same functionality the PSE shutdowns power to a disconnected port within 300 to 400ms The upper boundary is a physical human limit for disconnecting one PD and reconnecting another DC Disconnect DC Disconnect detection involves measurement of current Naturally a disconnected PD stops consuming current which can be inspected by the PSE The PSE must therefore disconnect power within 300 to 400 ms from the current flow stop The lower time boundary is important to prevent shutdown due to random fluctuations AC Disconnect This method is based on the fact that when a valid PD is connected to a port the AC impedance measured on its terminals is significantly lower than in the case of an open port disconnected PD AC Disconnect detection involves the induction of low AC signal in addition to the 48 VDC operating voltage The returned AC signal amplitude is monitored by the PSE at the port terminals During normal operation the PD s relatively low impedance lowers the returned AC signal while a sudden disconnection of this PD will cause a surge to the full AC signal level and will indicate PD disconnection 334 GE DSG 244 DSSG
125. all IPv4 frames Pv4 ICMP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with ICMP protocol Pv4 UDP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with UDP protocol Pv4 TCP The ACE will match IPv4 frames with TCP protocol Pv4 Other The ACE will match IPv4 frames which are not CMP UDP TCP Action ndicates the forwarding action of the ACE Permit Frames matching the ACE may be forwarded and learned Deny Frames matching the ACE are dropped Rate Limiter ndicates the rate limiter number of the ACE The allowed range is 1 to 15 When Disabled is displayed the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Copy Indicates the port copy operation of the ACE Frames matching the ACE are copied to the port number The allowed values are 170 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Disabled or a specific port number When Disabled is displayed the port copy operation is disabled Logging ndicates the logging operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Indicates the port shut down operation of the ACE Possible values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Counter The counter indicates t
126. ame The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may request the current values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Write View Name The name of the MIB view defining the MIB objects for which this request may potentially SET new values The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Configure SNMPv3 communities table on this page The entry index key is Community The SNMPv3 Communities Configuration screen in Figure 4 27 appears 68 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 27 SNMPv3 Communities Configuration page screenshot SNMPv3 Communities Configuration Delete Community Source IP Source Mask go public 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o private 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Add new community Save Reset This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Community Indicates the community access string to permit access to SNMPv3 agent The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Source IP Indicates the SNMP access source address Source Mask Indicates the SNMP access source address mask SNMPv3 Groups Configuration Configur
127. ame gt Firmware file name 246 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode IP Configuration Description Show IP configuration Syntax IP Configuration Example Show IP configuration Switch gt ip configuration DHCP Client Disabled IP Address 192 168 100 105 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 100 1 VLANID 1 SNTP Server 0 0 0 0 IP DHCP Description Set or show the DHCP client mode Syntax IP DHCP enable disable Parameters enable Enable or renew DHCP client disable Disable DHCP client Default Setting Disable Example Disable DHCP server SWITCH gt ip dhcp disable GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 247 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode IP Setup Description Set or show the IP setup Syntax IP Setup lt ip_addr gt lt ip_mask gt lt ip_router gt lt vid gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address lt ip_mask gt IP subnet mask a b c d default Show IP mask lt ip_router gt IP router a b c d default Show IP router lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show VLAN ID Default Setting IP Address 192 168 0 100 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 IP Router 192 168 0 1 VLAN ID 1 Example Set IP address SWITCH gt ip setup 192 168 0 100 255 255 255 0 248 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode IP Ping Description Ping IP address IC
128. and manage the Managed Switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the Managed Switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or later Safari or Mozilla Firefox 2 0 or later Figure 3 3 Web management setup Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Brower a AIAN IP Adress RJ 45 UTP Cable 192 168 0 100 IP Adress 192 168 0 x Figure 3 4 Web main screen of Managed Switch GE DSSG 244 Welcome to GE Security GE DSSG 244 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 24 SFP Management Switch Copyright 2009 GE Security Corporation All rights reserve d GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 39 Chapter 3 Switch Management SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the Managed Switch such as SNMPc Network Manager HP Openview Network Node Management NNM or What sup Gold This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the Managed Switch a
129. articular row apply to the frame type listed here unicast multicast broadcast Status Enable or disable the storm control status for the given frame type Rate The rate unit is packet per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128k 256K 512K or 1024K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps Multicast IGMP Snooping The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP lets host and routers share information about multicast groups memberships IGMP snooping is a switch feature that monitors the exchange of IGMP messages and copies them to the CPU for feature processing The overall purpose of IGMP Snooping is to limit the forwarding of multicast frames to only ports that are a member of the multicast group About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if mult
130. astructure might be mixed Assigning a unique range of VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations require intensive processing of VLAN mapping tables and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN limit of 4096 Customer A s LAN Branch Office Customer A s LAN Headquarter GE DS 242 PoE MAN Edge Switch MAN Service Provider Domain GE DS 242 PoE n 3 Q in Q lt Q in Q Backbone Core Switch MAN Edge Switch VLAN Tag Tag MAN Edge Switch VLAN 1 20 Er Customer B s LAN Factory Customer B s LAN Headquarter The Managed Switch supports multiple VLAN tags and can therefore be used in MAN applications as a provider bridge aggregating traffic from numerous independent customer LANs into the MAN Metro Access Network space One of the purposes of the provider bridge is to recognize and use VLAN tags so that the VLANs in the MAN space can be used independent of the customers VLANs This is accomplished by adding a VLAN tag with a MAN related VID for frames entering the MAN When leaving the MAN the tag is stripped and the original VLAN tag with the customer related VID is again available This provides a tunneling mechanism to connect remote costumer VLANs through a common MAN space without interfering with the VLAN tags All tags use EtherType 0x8100 or Ox88A8 where 0x8100 is used for customer tags and 0x88A8 are used for service provider tags GE DSG 2
131. ays forwarded on the same link aggregation member port Reording of frames within a flow is therefore not possible The aggregation code is based on the following information GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 83 Chapter 4 Web based Management e Source MAC e Destination MAC e Source and destination IPv4 address e Source and destination TCP UDP ports for IPv4 packets Normally all 5 contributions to the aggregation code should be enabled to obtain the best traffic distribution among the link aggregation member ports Each link aggregation may consist of up to 16 member ports Any quantity of link aggregation s may be configured for the device only limited by the quantity of ports on the device To configure a proper traffic distribution the ports within a link aggregation must use the same link speed Static Aggregation Configuration This page is used to configure the Aggregation hash mode and the aggregation group The aggregation hash mode settings are global whereas the aggregation group relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Hash Code Contributors Figure 4 39 Aggregation Mode Configuration page screenshot Aggregation Mode Configuration Stack Global Settings Hash Code Contributors Source MAC Address Destination MAC Address IP Address TCP UDP Port Number THO Aggregation Group Configuration for Switch 1 Port Members Object Descri
132. b based Management Figure 4 55 RSTP Port Status page screenshot RSTP Port Status for Switch 1 Port Role State Bridge 1 Non STP Non STP 2 Non STP Non STP 3 Non STP Non STP 4 Non STP Non STP 5 Non STP Non STP 6 7 8 9 Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP Non STP 10 Non STP Non STP 11 Non STP Non STP 12 Non STP Non STP 13 Non STP Non STP 14 Non STP Non STP 15 Non STP Non STP 16 Non STP Non STP 17 Non STP Non STP 18 Non STP Non STP 19 Non STP Non STP 20 Non STP Non STP f 21 Non STP Non STP f 22 Non STP Non STP 23 Non STP Non STP 24 Non STP_Non STP Auto efresh C Refresh This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port Role The current RSTP port role The port role can be one of the following values Disabled Alternate Backup Root Designated Non STP State The current RSTP port state The port state can be one of the following values Disabled Blocking Learning Forwarding Non STP Bridge 118 The RSTP Bridge instance VLAN ID This is also a link to the RSTP Detailed Bridge Status if the port is RSTP enabled GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management RSTP Port Statistics This page displays the RSTP port statistics counters for port physical ports in the currently selected switch The
133. based Management Consumption In this mode the ports are shut down when the actual power consumption for all ports exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver or if the actual power consumption for a given port exceeds the reserved power for that port The ports are shut down according to the ports priority If two ports have the same priority the port with the highest port number is shut down Priority mode In this mode the user assign the priority to the ports PD When the total PoE power consumption request is over the allowed power supply limitation the system shut down PoE ports by port priority setting Ethernet Port Configuration This section allows the user to inspect and configure the current PoE port settings The screen shown in Figure 4 134 appears Figure 4 134 Power over Ethernet Status Power Over Ethernet Configuration for Switch 1 Power Management Mode Configuration Mode Auto mode Power Supply Configuration itachi MSi aed Aba Ethernet Port Configuration Port PoE Enabled Priority Maximum Power W Power Allocation W High High High High High High High High High High Z High High High g u dd lt o oo NONA WD lt o lt lt N lt w i GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 227 Chapter 4 Web based Management
134. below Figure 4 77 802 1x device role Authentication Server 802 1X RADIUS Switch WorkStations Ag Chas 146 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows xP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1 specification Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authenticat
135. bled Controls whether RSTP is enabled on this switch port Path Cost Controls the path cost incurred by the port The Auto setting will set the path cost as appropriate by the physical link speed using the 802 1D recommended values Using the Specific setting a user defined value can be entered The path cost is used when establishing the active topology of the network Lower path cost ports are chosen as forwarding ports in favor of higher path cost ports Valid values are in the range 1 to 200000000 Priority Controls the port priority This can be used to control priority of ports having identical port cost See above Default 128 Range 0 240 in steps of 16 Edge Controls whether the port is known to connect directly to edge devices no Bridges attached The Edge flag is cleared by receipt of any BPDUs on the port Transitioning to the forwarding state is faster for edge ports than for other ports This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always Non Edge Point2Point Controls whether the port connects to a point to point LAN rather than a shared medium This can be automatically determined or forced either true or false Transitions to the forwarding state is faster for point to point LANs than for shared media This applies to physical ports only Aggregations are always forced Point2Point By default the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used on each port
136. c An Rak S Te y Dynsme UU 01 8U Se US CbD 4 Dymeme UU U3 Le J1 LE 3 Y Dynemc UV 0A 79 3 4 1 03 v vyneme UU Uc ee BU eY Ue of Dynemic AN AC AR NI R7 7F v Dynemic an on ar Ra 17 00 v Dynemic N 1 7 F 36 5 7 98 ff Dynemic 00 21 25 7F D8 BE i Dynsmic UU 29 se Le 1p 16 Z Dynemic Ans e E 9 40 y Dynemic n a 5e 7F 87 FA V Dynemic An i aa E e oF Dynamic AN 4 RE 7R FI 10 D Dynemic AN RE I FT AN J Dye 00 15 S 10 0B 23 va Dymemic nn s an rann y Dymemie nn S an 11 0 9 97 z An R aM 71 0 9 05 A GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Navigating the MAC Table Each page shows up to 999 entries from the MAC table default being 20 selected through the entries per page input field When first visited the web page will show the first 20 entries from the beginning of the MAC Table The first displayed will be the one with the lowest VLAN ID and the lowest MAC address found in the MAC Table The Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields allow the user to select the starting point in the MAC Table Clicking the Refresh button will update the displayed table starting from that or the closest next MAC Table match In addition the two input fields will upon a Refresh button click assume the value of the first displayed entry allowing for continuous refresh with the same start address The gt gt will use the last entry of the currently d
137. cess where two different devices establish the mode of operation and the speed settings that can be shared by those devices for a link DES is an acronym for Data Encryption Standard It provides a complete description of a mathematical algorithm for encrypting enciphering and decrypting deciphering binary coded information Encrypting data converts it to an unintelligible form called cipher Decrypting cipher converts the data back to its original form called plaintext The algorithm described in this standard specifies both enciphering and deciphering operations which are based on a binary number called a key DHCP is an acronym for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol It is a protocol used for assigning dynamic IP addresses to devices on a network DHCP used by networked computers clients to obtain IP addresses and other parameters such as the default gateway subnet mask and IP addresses of DNS servers from a DHCP server The DHCP server ensures that all IP addresses are unique for example no IP address is assigned to a second client while the first client s assignment is valid its lease has not expired Therefore IP address pool management is done by the server and not by a human network administrator Dynamic addressing simplifies network administration because the software keeps track of IP addresses rather than requiring an administrator to manage the task This means that a new computer can be added to a network without t
138. ch i e authenticator as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the switch and authentication server These parameters are described in this section The 802 1X Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 80 appears 152 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 80 802 1X Port Configuration page screenshot 802 1X Port Configuration for Switch 1 1 Authorized 802 1X Disabled 2 Authorized J 802 1X Disabled 3 Authorized 802 1X Disabled 4 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled 5 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled 6 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled 7 Authorized J 802 1X Disabled 8 Authorized 802 1X Disabled 9 Authorized J 802 1X Disabled 10 Authorized J 802 1X Disabled 11 Authorized 802 1X Disabled 12 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled 13 Authorized 802 1X Disabled 14 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled 15 Authorized J 802 1X Disabled 16 Authorized J 802 1X Disabled 17 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled 18 Authorized 802 1X Disabled 19 Authorized 802 1X Disabled 20 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled 21 Authorized J 802 1X Disabled 22 Authorized 802 1X Disabled 23 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled 24 Authorized 9 802 1X Disabled The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are Object Description Port The port number for which the configuration below applies Admin State Sets the authenticatio
139. ch this ACE Ethernet Type Only Ethernet Type frames can match this ACE ARP Only ARP frames can match this ACE IPv4 Only IPv4 frames can match this ACE Action Specify the action to take with a frame that hits this ACE Permit The frame that hits this ACE is granted permission for the ACE operation Deny The frame that hits this ACE is dropped Rate Limiter Specify the rate limiter in number of base units The allowed range is 1 to 15 Disabled indicates that the rate limiter operation is disabled Port Copy Frames that hit the ACE are copied to the port number specified here The allowed range is the same as the switch port number range Disabled indicates that the port copy operation is disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled Frames matching the ACE are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE Counter 172 The counter indicates the number of times the ACE was hit by a frame GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual MAC Parameters Object Chapter 4 Web based Management Description SMAC Filter Only displayed w
140. client is authorized or unauthorized As long as the RADIUS server hasn t successfully authenticated a client it is unauthorized Last Authentication Show the date and time of the last authentication of the client This gets updated for every re authentication of the client 160 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Windows Platform RADIUS Server Configuration Setup the RADIUS server and assign the client IP address to the Managed switch In this case field in the default IP Address of the Managed Switch with 192 168 0 100 And also make sure the shared secret key is as same as the one you had set at the Managed Switch s 802 1x system configuration 12345678 at this case 1 Enable the 802 1x Authentication Mode and configure the IP Address of remote RADIUS server and secret key Figure 4 83 802 1x Configuration System screenshot 192 168 0 200 2 Add New RADIUS Client on the Windows 2003 server GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 161 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 84 Windows Server add new RADIUS client setting Internet Authentication Service Se 8 e net Authentication Service Local 3 Assign the client IP address to the Managed switch Figure 4 85 Windows Server add new RADIUS client setting New RADIUS Client Na Friendly name 8021x Managed Switch Cc ddress IP or DNS Cancel 162 GE DS
141. com For contact information see our Web site www gesecurity eu Content Chapter 1 Introduction 1 Package Contents 2 Product Description 2 How to Use this Manual 5 Product Specification 9 Chapter 2 Installation 15 Hardware Description 16 Switch Installation 24 Stack Installation 29 Chapter 3 Switch Management 35 Requirements 35 Management Access Overview 36 The Administration Console 37 Web Management 39 SNMP Based Network Management 40 Protocols 40 Management Architecture 41 Chapter 4 Web Based Management 43 About Web based Management 43 System 48 Simple Network Management Protocol 63 Port Management 73 Link Aggregation 82 VLAN 90 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol 104 Quality of Service 120 Multicast 136 IEEE 802 1X Network Access Control 145 Access Control Lists 169 Address Table 196 Port Security 200 LLDP 202 Network Diagnostics 209 Stacking GE DSSG 244 GE DSSG 244 PoE 211 Power Over Ethernet 224 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 5 Command Line Interface 235 Accessing the CLI 235 Telnet login 239 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode 241 Link Aggregation Command 258 VLAN Configuration Command 265 Spanning Tree Protocol Command 272 Multicast Configuration Command 279 Quality of Service Command 285 802 1x Port Access Control Command 294 Access Control List Command 302 MAC Address Table Command 307 LLDP Command 312 Stack Management Command 317 Power over Ethernet Command 320 Chapter 7 Switch Ope
142. complex features For example the IMAP4 protocol leaves your email messages on the server rather than downloading them to your computer If you wish to remove your messages from the server you must use your mail client to generate local folders copy messages to your local hard drive and then delete and expunge the messages from the server 346 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Appendix B Glossary Term IPMC LACP LLDP MAC Table MD5 Mirroring Definition IP is an acronym for Internet Protocol It is a protocol used for communicating data across an internet network IP is a best effort system which means that no packet of information sent over it is assured to reach its destination in the same condition it was sent Each device connected to a Local Area Network LAN or Wide Area Network WAN is given an Internet Protocol address and this IP address is used to identify the device uniquely among all other devices connected to the extended network The current version of the Internet protocol is IPv4 which has 32 bits Internet Protocol addresses allowing for in excess of four billion unique addresses This number is reduced drastically by the practice of webmasters taking addresses in large blocks the bulk of which remain unused There is a rather substantial movement to adopt a new version of the Internet Protocol IPv6 which would have 128 bits Internet Protocol addresses This number can be
143. dcast enable disable lt packet_rate gt 292 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters enable Enable broadcast storm control disable Disable broadcast storm control lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting Disabled 1pps Example Enable broadcast storm rate limiter in 1kpps GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 293 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode 802 1x Port Access Control Command Dot1x Configuration Description Show 802 1X configuration Syntax Dot1x Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show IEEE802 1x status of port1 SWITCH gt dot1x configuration 1 Mode Disabled RADIUS Server 0 0 0 0 RADIUS Secret Reauthentication Disabled 3600 300 10 Port AdminState Port State Last Source Last ID Authorized 802 1 Disabled Dotx1 Mode Description Set or show the 802 1X mode for the switch Syntax Dot1x Mode enable disable 294 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters enable Enable 802 1X disable Disable 802 1X default Show 802 1X mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable IEEE802 1x function for port1 SWITCH gt dot1x mode enable Dot1x Status Description Set or show the 802 1X port state Syntax Dot1x State lt port_list g
144. device supports the following Aggregation links e Static LAGs Port Trunk Force aggregated selected ports to be a trunk group e Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LAGs LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device If the other device ports are also LACP ports the devices establish a LAG between them Figure 4 38 Link Aggregation Link Aggregation 4 Port aggregate up to 4Gbps 82 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management The Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP provides a standardized means for exchanging information between Partner Systems that require high speed redundant links Link aggregation lets you group up to eight consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection This feature can expand bandwidth to a device on the network LACP operation requires full duplex mode more detail information refer to the IEEE 802 3ad standard Port link aggregations can be used to increase the bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery Link aggregation lets you group up to 4 consecutive ports into a single dedicated connection between any two the Switch or other Layer 2 switches However before making any physical connections between devices use the Link aggregation Configuration menu to specify the link aggregation on the devices at both ends When using a port link aggregation note that e The ports used in a link aggr
145. dy for use Figure 4 106 New Configuration Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Any Frame Type Action Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter IPv4 ICMP DoS Ping of Death Deny Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 0 S amp S 192 C Auto refresh GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Configure the rate limiter for the ACL of the switch The ACL Rate Limiter Configuration screen in Figure 4 107 appears Figure 4 107 ACL Rate Limiter Configuration page screenshot ACL Rate Limiter Configuration Rate Limiter ID Rate pps 1 52 D 2 26 E 31 Q sn E su ff 61 D r sh G s4 5 0 1 D D 12 1 g 31 N hn Q cee This page includes the following fields Object Description Rate Limiter ID The rate limiter ID for the settings contained in the same row Rate The rate unit is packet per second pps configure the rate as 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1K 2K 4K 8K 16K 32K 64K 128K 256K 512K or 1024K The 1 kpps is actually 1002 1 pps GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 193 Chapter 4 Web based Management ACL Ports Configuration Configure the ACL parameters ACE of each switch port These parameters will affect frames received on a port unless the frame matches a specific ACE The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the p
146. e 802 1Q standard Because the VID is 12 bits long 4094 unique VLAN can be identified 92 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management The tag is inserted into the packet header making the entire packet longer by 4 octets All of the information originally contained in the packet is retained 802 1Q Tag User Priority CFI VLAN ID VID l 3 bits 1 bits 12 bits TPID Tag Protocol Identifier TCI Tag Control Information 2 bytes 2 bytes Destination Source Ethernet Preamble Address Address VLAN TAG Type Data FCS 6 bytes 6 bytes 4 bytes 2 bytes 46 1517 bytes 4 bytes The Ether Type and VLAN ID are inserted after the MAC source address but before the original Ether Type Length or Logical Link Control Because the packet is now a bit longer than it was originally the Cyclic Redundancy Check CRC must be recalculated Adding an IEEE802 1Q Tag Dest Addr Src Addr Length E type Data Old CRC Original Ethernet Dest Addr Src Addr E type Tag Length E type Data New CRC wa New Tagged Packet riority CFI VLAN ID Port VLAN ID Packets that are tagged are carrying the 802 1Q VID information can be transmitted from one 802 1Q compliant network device to another with the VLAN information intact This allows 802 1Q VLAN to span network devices and indeed the entire n
147. e Port VLAN ID GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 99 Chapter 4 Web based Management VLAN Membership Configuration Adding Static Members to VLANs VLAN Index Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802 19 VLAN compliant devices or untagged they are not connected to any VLAN aware devices The VLAN membership configuration for the selected stack switch unit switch can be monitored and modified here Up to 64 VLANs are supported This page allows for adding and deleting VLANs as well as adding and deleting port members of each VLAN The VLAN Membership Configuration screen in Figure 4 47 appears Figure 4 47 VLAN Membership Configuration page screenshot VLAN Membership Configuration for Switch 1 Port Members Delete VLANID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 o MMMM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM Add new VLAN Save Reset 100 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete To delete a VLAN entry check this box The entry will be deleted on all stack switch units during the next Save VLAN ID Indicates the ID of this particular VLAN Port Members A row of check boxes for each port is displayed for each VLAN ID To include a port in a VLAN check the box To remove or exclude the port from t
148. e SNMPv3 groups table on this page The entry index keys are Security Model and Security Name The SNMPv3 Groups Configuration screen in Figure 4 28 appears Figure 4 28 SNMPv3 Groups Configuration page screenshot SNMPv3 Groups Configuration vi public default_ro_group o vi private default_rw_group v2c public default_ro_group oO v2c private default_rw_group o usm default_user default_rw_group Add new group Reset GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 69 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM Security Name A string identifying the security name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Configure SNMPv3 users table on this page The entry index keys are Engine ID and User Name The SNMPv3 Users Configuration screen in Figure 4 29 app
149. e Web Based Management supports Internet Explorer 6 0 It is based on Java Applets with an aim to reduce network bandwidth consumption enhance access speed and present an easy viewing screen NOTE By default IE6 0 or later version does not allow Java Applets to open sockets The user has to explicitly modify the browser setting to enable Java Applets to use network ports The Managed Switch can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP subnet address with the Managed Switch For example the default IP address of the Managed Switch is 192 168 0 100 then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 0 x where x is a number between 1 and 254 except 100 and the default subnet mask is 255 255 255 0 If you have changed the default IP address of the Managed Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 2 and 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 43 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 1 Web management setup Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE Brower IP Adress RJ 45 UTP Cable 192 168 0 100 IP Adress 192 168 0 x Logging on the Switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 6 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address is http 192 168 0 100
150. ears Figure 4 29 SNMPv3 Users Configuration page screenshot Delete Lo 70 SNMPv3 Users Configuration Engine ID Name Protocol Password 800007e5017f000001 default_user NoAuth NoPriv None None None None Add new user Save Reset GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Engine ID A octet string identifying the engine ID that this entry should belong to The string must contain an even number between 10 and 64 hexadecimal digits but all zeros and all F s are not allowed User Name A string identifying the user name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy The value of security level cannot be modified if entry already exists That means must first ensure that the value is set correctly Authentication Protocol Indicates the authentication protocol that this entry should belong to Possible authentication protocol are None None authentication protocol MDS An optional
151. ected by cable losses Classifying a PD according to its power consumption may assist a PoE system in optimizing its power distribution Such a system typically suffers from lack of power resources so that efficient power management based on classification results may reduce total system costs Start up Once line detection and optional classification stages are completed the PSE must switch from low voltage to its full voltage capacity 44 57 Volts over a minimal amount of time above 15 microseconds A gradual startup is required as a sudden rise in voltage reaching high frequencies would introduce noise on the data lines Once the provision of power is initiated it is common for inrush current to be experienced at the PSE port due to the PD s input capacitance A PD must be designed to cease inrush current consumption of over 350 mA within 50 ms of power provisional startup Operation During normal operation the PSE provides 44 57 VDC able to support a minimum of 15 4 watts power Power Disconnection Scenarios The IEEE 802 3af standard requires that devices powered over Ethernet be disconnected safely i e power needs be shut down within a short period of time following disconnection of a PD from an active port When a PD is disconnected there is a danger that it could be replaced by a non PoE ready device while power is still on Imagine disconnecting a powered IP phone GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manu
152. ed to access the network through that port If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by disabling the port and sending a trap message lt source MAC address VLAN gt pair for frames received on the port Note that you can also manually add secure addresses to the port using the Static Address Table The selected port will stop learning The MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the switch 200 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management MAC Table Learning Figure 4 112 Port Security Settings screenshot Port Security MAC Table Learning for Switch 1 g Port Members 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1819 20 21 22 23 24 OROKOROROROHORORORORORORORORORORO ODOC OOCOODOOCOOCOOCO OOO j oo0oo0o000000090000 aig il e This page includes the following fields Object Description Auto Learning is done automatically as soon as a frame with unknown SMAC is received Disable No learning is done Secure Only static MAC entries are learned all other frames are dropped NOTE Make sure that the link used for managing the switch is added to the Static Mac Table before changing to secure learning mode otherwise the management link is lost and can
153. een in Figure 4 73 appears Figure 4 73 IGMP Snooping Configuration page screenshot IGMP Snooping This page includes the following fields Object Description Snooping Enabled Enable the Global IGMP Snooping Unregistered IPMC Enable unregistered IPMC traffic flooding Flooding enabled VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the entry IGMP Snooping Enabled Enable the per VLAN IGMP Snooping IGMP Querier Enable the IGMP Querier in the VLAN The Querier will send out if no Querier received in 255 seconds after IGMP Querier Enabled Each Querier s interval is 125 second and it will stop act as an IGMP Querier if received any Querier from other devices GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 141 Chapter 4 Web based Management IGMP Port Related Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The IGMP Port Related Configuration screen in Figure 4 74 appears Figure 4 74 IGMP Port Related Configuration page screenshot IGMP Port Related Configuration for Switch 1 Port Router Port Fast Leave 1 j 4 6 8 g a 9 10 o a 11 D o 12 O o 13 m 14 go C 15 o O 16 o a 17 o o 18 19 E El 20 4 a 21 j 2 oO 23 0 m A
154. efresh 50 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual IP Configuration Chapter 4 Web based Management The IP Configuration includes the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway The Configured column is used to view or change the IP configuration Fill up the IP Address Subnet Mask and Gateway for the device The screen in Figure 4 8 appears Figure 4 8 IP configuration interface IP Configuration Configured Current DHCP Client o IP Address 10 1 1 241 10 1 1 241 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 255 255 255 0 IP Router 10 1 1 254 10 1 1 254 VLANID 1 1 The Current column is used to show the active IP configuration Object Description DHCP Client Enable the DHCP client by checking this box If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is zero DHCP will retry If DHCP fails and the configured IP address is non zero DHCP will stop and the configured IP settings will be used The DHCP client will announce the configured System Name as hostname to provide DNS lookup IP Address Provide the IP address of this switch in dotted decimal notation IP Mask Provide the IP mask of this switch dotted decimal notation IP Router Provide the IP address of the router in dotted decimal notation SNTP Server Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation VLAN ID Provide the managed VLAN ID The allowed range is 1 through 4095 Timezone Offset GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE
155. egation must all be of the same media type RJ 45 100 Mbps fiber e The ports that can be assigned to the same link aggregation have certain other restrictions see below e Ports can only be assigned to one link aggregation e The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as link aggregation ports e None of the ports in a link aggregation can be configured as a mirror source port or a mirror target port e All of the ports in a link aggregation have to be treated as a whole when moved from to added or deleted from a VLAN e The Spanning Tree Protocol will treat all the ports in a link aggregation as a whole e Enable the link aggregation prior to connecting any cable between the switches to avoid creating a data loop e Disconnect all link aggregation port cables or disable the link aggregation ports before removing a port link aggregation to avoid creating a data loop It allows a maximum of 16 ports to be aggregated at the same time The Managed Switch support Gigabit Ethernet ports up to 12 groups If the group is defined as a LACP static link aggregation group then any extra ports selected are placed in a standby mode for redundancy if one of the other ports fails If the group is defined as a local static link aggregation group then the number of ports must be the same as the group member ports The aggregation code ensures that frames belonging to the same frame flow for example a TCP connection are alw
156. eiving data over that port LNK ACT Off If 10 100 LNK ACT LED is light it indicates that the port is operating at 1OMbps or 100Mbps If 10 100 LNK ACT LED is Off it indicates that the port is link down Lights To indicate the port is providing 48VDC in line power POE In Use range Off To indicate the connected device is not a PoE Powered Device PD 1000Base SX LX SFP interfaces Shared Port 21 Port 24 Color Function 10 100 1000 Lights To indicate the link through that SFP port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps with Gigabit SFP transceiver or 100Mbps with 100Base FX SFP transceiver Off To indicate that the SFP port is link down GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 21 Chapter 2 Installation 7 Segment LED Display Stack ID 1 9 A F 0 To indicate the Switch ID of each GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch Switch IDs are used to uniquely identify the Managed Switches within a stack The Switch ID of each Managed Switch is shown on the display on the front of the Managed Switch and is used widely in the web pages as well as in the CLI commands of the Stack group sao t 2 Bf fs 6 Pe fp lA je ic po fe fo swt bs 6 erei hop be fs be bs be Switch Rear Panel The rear panel of the Managed Switch indicates an AC inlet power socket which accepts input power from 100 to 240V AC 50 60Hz Figure 2 7 to Figure 2 9 shows the rear panel of these Managed Switches Figure 2 7 GE DSG 244 Rear
157. emely large amounts of data in a secure topology linking for backbone or high capacity network server The stacking technology also enables the chassis based switches to be integrated into GE DSSG series Managed Switch but without the expensive up front cost The following table lists the major hardware difference between the series models GE DSG 244 GE DSSG 244 GE DSSG 244 POE a o o e T a Hardware stacking up to 16 units How to Use this Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section Section Content INTRODUCTION Product description with features and specifications INSTALLATION Explains the functions of the Managed Switch and how to physically install the Managed Switch Contains information about the software function of the Managed Switch WEB BASED MANAGEMENT Explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Web interface SWITCH MANAGEMENT COMMAND LINE Explains how to manage the Managed Switch by Command Line INTERFACE interface COMMAND LINE MODE An extensive listing of all commands and their description SWITCH OPERATION Explains how to operate the Managed Switch POWER OVER ETHERNET Introduces the IEEE 802 3af PoE standard and PoE provision of the OVERVIEW Managed Switch TROUBLESHOOTING Explains how to troubleshoot the Managed Switch APPENDIX A Contains cable information for the Managed Switch APPENDIX B Glossary GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 5 Chapter 1 Introducti
158. emented with an address table This address table composed of many entries Each entry is used to store the address information of some node in network including MAC address port no etc This in formation comes from the learning process of Ethernet Switch Learning When one packet comes in from any port the Switch will record the source address port no And the other related information in address table This information will be used to decide either forwarding or filtering for future packets Forwarding amp Filtering When one packet comes from some port of the Ethernet Switching it will also check the destination address besides the source address learning The Ethernet Switching will lookup the address table for the destination address If not found this packet will be forwarded to all the other ports except the port which this packet comes in And these ports will transmit this packet to the network it connected If found and the destination address is located at different port from this packet comes in the Ethernet Switching will forward this packet to the port where this destination address is located according to the information from address table But if the destination address is located at the same port with this packet comes in then this packet will be filtered Thereby increasing the network throughput and availability GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 327 Chapter 7 Switch Operation Store and Forward St
159. en in Figure 4 82 appears Figure 4 82 802 1X Statistics Port 1 page screenshot 802 1X Statistics for Switch 1 Port 1 Pot 1 D Receive EAPOL Counters Transmit EAPOL Counters Total 0 Total 0 Response ID 0 Request ID 0 Responses 0 Requests 0 Start 0 Logoff 0 Invalid Type 0 Invalid Length 0 Receive RADIUS Counters Transmit RADIUS Counters Access Challenges 0 Responses 0 Other Requests 0 Auth Successes 0 Auth Failures 0 Version 0 Source Identity Auto etresh D The selected port belongs to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the table header EAPOL Counters These counters are not available for MAC based ports Supplicant frame counter statistics There are seven receiving frame counters and three transmitting frame counters EAPOL Counters The number of valid EAPOL frames of any dot1xAuthEapolFramesRx type that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAP Resp ID frames Response ID dot1xAuthEapolRespldFramesRx that have been received by the switch Responses __ dot1xAuthEapolRespFramesRx The number of valid EAPOL response GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 157 Chapter 4 Web based Management EAPOL Counters Description frames other than Resp D frames that have been received by the switch The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by the switch The number of valid EAPOL logoff frames Rx Logoff dot1xAuthEapolLogoffFramesRx that have been
160. ent storage over a computer network A LLDP frame contains multiple TLVs For some TLVs it is configurable if the switch shall include the TLV in the LLDP frame These TLVs are known as optional TLVs If an optional TLVs is disabled the corresponding information is not included in the LLDP frame ping is a program that sends a series of packets over a network or the Internet to a specific computer in order to generate a response from that computer The other computer responds with an acknowledgment that it received the packets Ping was created to verify whether a specific computer on a network or the Internet exists and is connected Ping uses Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP packets The PING Request is the packet from the origin computer and the PING Reply is the packet response from the target A policer can limit the bandwidth of received frames It is located in front of the ingress queue 348 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Appendix B Glossary Term POP3 Private VLAN Q QCE QCL QoS RARP Definition POP3 is an acronym for Post Office Protocol version 3 It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server POP3 is designed to delete mail on the server as soon as the user has downloaded it However some implementations allow users or an administrator to specify that mail be saved for some period of time POP can be thought of as a store and forward
161. ent to be present as discussed under Reauthentication Enabled above The solution is aging of authenticated clients The Age Period which can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds works like this A timer is started when the client gets authenticated After half the age period the switch starts looking for frames sent by the client If another half age period elapses and no frames are seen the client is considered removed from the system and it will have to authenticate again the next time a frame is seen from it If on the other hand the client transmits a frame before the second half of the age period expires the switch will consider the client alive and leave it authenticated and restart the age timer Hold Time This setting applies to ports running MAC based authentication only If the RADIUS server denies a client access or a RADIUS server request times out after 40 seconds with two retries the client is put on hold in the Unauthorized state In this state frames from the client will not cause the switch to attempt to reauthenticate the client The Hold Time which can be set to a number between 10 and 1000000 seconds determines the time after an EAP Failure indication or RADIUS timeout that a client is not allowed access 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication Port Configuration When 802 1X is enabled you need to configure the parameters for the authentication process that runs between the client and the swit
162. er change the default password if you forget the password Press the Reset button in the front panel of the Managed Switch over 10 seconds and then release the current setting includes VLAN will be lost and the Managed Switch will restore to the default mode SNTP Configuration In the System sub function menu you can see the SNTP Configuration by which you can configure the time settings for the Managed Switch You can specify SNTP Servers and set GMT Timezone The SNTP Configuration screen in Figure 4 9 appears Figure 4 9 SNTP Configuration page screenshot SNTP Server SNTP Configuration asia pool ntp org 202 134 1 10 Timezone GMT 0 Casablanca Monrovia Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon Lonc K System Date 2009 10 21 Wed 06 56 00 0000 System Uptime 6d 03 20 42 This page includes the following fields Object Description SNTP Server Provide the IP address of the SNTP Server in dotted decimal notation Enter a user defined SNTP server IP addresses or hostname This is a text string of up to 64 characters containing the encoded unicast IP address or hostname of a SNTP server Unicast SNTP requests will be sent to this address If this address is a DNS hostname then that hostname should be resolved into an IP address each time a SNTP request is sent to it Timezone Offset Provide the timezone offset relative to UTC GMT The offset is given in minutes east of GMT The valid range is from 72
163. eration When this is in place one or more of the configured VLANs can be configured as private VLANs Ports in a private VLAN fall into one of these two groups e Promiscuous ports o Ports from which traffic can be forwarded to all ports in the private VLAN o Ports which can receive traffic from all ports in the private VLAN e Isolated ports o Ports from which traffic can only be forwarded to promiscuous ports in the private VLAN o Ports which can receive traffic from only promiscuous ports in the private VLAN The configuration of promiscuous and isolated ports applies to all private VLANs When traffic comes in on a promiscuous port in a private VLAN the VLAN mask from the VLAN table is applied When traffic comes in on an isolated port the private VLAN mask is applied in addition to the VLAN mask from the VLAN table This reduces the ports to which forwarding can be done to just the promiscuous ports within the private VLAN The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header This feature works across the stack 102 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 48 Private VLAN Configuration page screenshot Port Isolation Configuration for Switch 1 Port Mode Promiscuous M Promiscuous 9 Promiscuous M Promiscuous K Promiscuous 4 Promiscuous M Promiscuous gj Promiscuous M Promiscuous 9 Promiscuous COnNnn
164. ers comprehensive Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge Its protection mechanisms also comprise of port based 802 1x and MAC based user and device authentication The port security is effective in limit the numbers of clients pass through so that network administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with time and effort considerably less than before Flexibility and Extension solution The mini GBIC slots are compatible with 1000Base Sx LX and WDM SFP Small Factor Pluggable fiber optic modules The distance can be extended from 550 meters Multi Mode fiber up to above 10 50 70 120 kilometers Single Mode fiber or WDM fiber They are well suited for using within the enterprise data centers and distributions Reliability Stacking Management The GE DSSG 244 Series Managed Switch provides a switch stacking function to manage up to 16 switches using a single IP address That helps network managers to easily configure switches via one single IP address instead of connecting and setting each unit one by one Through its high bandwidth tunnel and stacking technology it gives enterprise service provider and telcom flexible control over port density uplinks and switch stack performance Up to 384 Gigabit Ethernet ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports and functionality as needed The stacking technology also enables the advantages of chassis based switches to be integrated into GE D
165. es an overview of the stack topology as detected by SPROUT e Stack Topology The Stack Topology screen in Figure 4 124 appears GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 217 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 124 Stack Information page screenshot Stack Topology Stack Topology Stack Topology Cran Stack Member Count 3 Last Topology Change 1970 21 21 Thu 00 92 28 2000 Master Switch 0C 30 4f 76 26 3 Last Master Change This page includes the following fields Object Description Stack Topology Specifies the type of topology for the stack Chain A chain of switches that is no redundant forwarding paths Ring A ring of switches thereby providing redundant forwarding paths Back to Back Two switches interconnected on both stacking ports Stack Member Count The number of switches in the stack Last Topology Change The time of the last topology change in the stack Master Switch The MAC address of the current stack master switch Last Master Change The time of the last master change in the stack Stack List For each switch in the stack the following information is shown The MAC address Switch ID product name and version and master election state The master election state is normally No Only when the user enforces a forced master election the master election state takes the value Yes For details about the master election algorithm see Stack Configuration The Stack List
166. eserved Help Button Panel Display The web agent displays an image of the Managed Switch s ports The Mode can be set to display different information for the ports including Link up or Link down Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows State Disabled Down Link RJ 45 Ports SFP Ports PoE Ports 46 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Main Menu Chapter 4 Web based Management Using the onboard web agent you can define system parameters manage and control the Managed Switch and all its ports or monitor network conditions Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the Managed Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 5 appears Figure 4 5 GE DSG GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch Main Functions Menu e e et System SNMP Port Management Link Aggregation VLAN Spanning Tree Multicast QoS 802 1X Authentication Access Control List MAC Address Table LLDP Diagnostics Stack GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 47 Chapter 4 Web based Management System Use the System menu items to display and configure basic administrative details of the Managed Switch Under System the following topics are provided to configure and view the system information This section has the following items System Information IP Configuration User Authen
167. etwork if all network devices are 802 1Q compliant Every physical port on a switch has a PVID 802 1Q ports are also assigned a PVID for use within the switch If no VLAN are defined on the switch all ports are then assigned to a default VLAN with a PVID equal to 1 Untagged packets are assigned the PVID of the port on which they were received Forwarding decisions are based upon this PVID in so far as VLAN are concerned Tagged packets are forwarded according to the VID contained within the tag Tagged packets are also assigned a PVID but the PVID is not used to make packet forwarding decisions the VID is Tag aware switches must keep a table to relate PVID within the switch to VID on the network The switch will compare the VID of a packet to be transmitted to the VID of GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 93 Chapter 4 Web based Management the port that is to transmit the packet If the two VID are different the switch will drop the packet Because of the existence of the PVID for untagged packets and the VID for tagged packets tag aware and tag unaware network devices can coexist on the same network A switch port can have only one PVID but can have as many VID as the switch has memory in its VLAN table to store them Because some devices on a network may be tag unaware a decision must be made at each port on a tag aware device before packets are transmitted should the packet to be transmitted have a tag or not If t
168. ew IP address setting immediately You can access the Web interface of GE DSG GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch through the new IP address NOTE If you are not familiar with console command or the related parameter enter help anytime in console to get the help description You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 238 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Telnet login The Managed Switch also supports telnet for remote management The switch asks for user name and password for remote login when using telnet please use admin for password NOTE See the Installation Sheet that came with this product for a Telnet step by step procedure using Hyper Terminal Figure 5 4 Telnet login screen cx Telnet 192 168 0 100 Welcome to GE Security Command Line Interface Port Numbers 4 4 4 11 i 12 14i16 i 0 22 24 ee i 9111 1315 oe oe oes Password Type help or to get help SWITCH
169. ewn a Promiscuous D Promiscuous D3 13 Promiscuous 14 Promiscuous v 15 Promiscuous 16 Promiscuous 3 17 Promiscuous ha 18 Promiscuous 19 Promiscuous 20 Promiscuous g 21 Promiscuous 22 Promiscuous g 23 Promiscuous fa 24 Promiscuous Save This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The switch interface PVLAN Port Type Displays private VLAN port types Isolated A single stand alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port and one or more isolated or host ports This VLAN conveys traffic between the isolated ports and a lone promiscuous port Promiscuous A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces within a private VLAN This is the default setting GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 103 Chapter 4 Web based Management Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol The Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP is an evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol and provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change The system also supports STP and the system will auto detect the connected device that is running STP or RSTP protocol Theory The Spanning Tree protocol can be used to detect and disable network loops and to provide backup links between switches bridges or routers This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any two stations on
170. f 15 33 kQ Classification Measure which power level class the resistor indicates 14 5 20 5 125 250 Startup Where the powered device will startup gt 42 gt 38 Normal operation _ Supply power to device 36 57 25 0 60 0 Line Detection Before power is applied safety dictates that it must first be ensured that a valid PD is connected to the PSE s output This process is referred to as line detection and involves the PSE seeking a specific 25 KO signature resistor Detection of this signature indicates that a valid PD is connected and that provision of power to the device may commence The signature resistor lies in the PD s PoE front end isolated from the rest of the PD s circuitries till detection is certified 332 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 8 Power Over Ethernet Overview Classification Once a PD is detected the PSE may optionally perform classification to determine the maximal power a PD is to consume The PSE induces 15 5 20 5 VDC limited to 100 mA for a period of 10 to 75 ms responded by a certain current consumption by the PD indicating its power class The PD is assigned to one of 5 classes O default class indicates that full 15 4 watts should be provided 1 3 indicate various required power levels and 4 is reserved for future use PDs that do not support classification are assigned to class 0 Special care must be employed in the definition of class thresholds as classification may be aff
171. f the SYS LED light on you can use the WEB browser to login the Switch 62 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Overview The Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is an application layer protocol that facilitates the exchange of management information between network devices It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol suite SNMP enables network administrators to manage network performance find and solve network problems and plan for network growth An SNMP managed network consists of three key components Network management stations NMSs SNMP agents Management information base MIB and network management protocol e Network management stations NMSs Sometimes called consoles these devices execute management applications that monitor and control network elements Physically NMSs are usually engineering workstation caliber computers with fast CPUs megapixel color displays substantial memory and abundant disk space At least one NMS must be present in each managed environment e Agents Agents are software modules that reside in network elements They collect and store management information such as the number of error packets received by a network element e Management information base MIB A MIB is a collection of managed objects residing in a virtual information store Collections of related mana
172. feit MAC addresses which makes MAC based authentication less secure than 802 1X authentication The 802 1X System Configuration screen in Figure 4 79 appears To enable 802 1x from System System Information Misc Config then you still to fill in the authentication server information 150 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 79 802 1X Configuration page screenshot 802 1X Configuration for Switch 1 System Configuration Stack Global Mode Disabled RADIUS IP 0 0 0 0 RADIUS Secret Reauthentication Enabled Reauthentication Period seconds EAP Timeout 30 seconds Age Period 300 seconds Hold Time 10 seconds Save Reset Refresh After enabling the IEEE 802 1X function you can configure the parameters of this function This page includes the following fields Object Description Mode Indicates if 802 1X and MAC based authentication is globally enabled or disabled on the switchstack If globally disabled all ports are allowed forwarding of frames RADIUS IP The IP address of the RADIUS Server expressed in dotted decimal notation If the RADIUS IP changes while the protocol is globally enabled then all ports clients will get reinitialized RADIUS Secret The secret up to 29 characters long shared between the RADIUS Server and the switchstack Reauthentication Enabled If checked clients are reauthenticated after the i
173. fic SIP mask in dotted decimal notation DIP Filter Specify the destination IP filter for this ACE Any No destination IP filter is specified Destination IP filter is don t care Host Destination IP filter is set to Host Specify the destination IP address in the DIP Address field that appears Network Destination IP filter is set to Network Specify the destination IP address and destination IP mask in the DIP Address and DIP Mask fields that appear DIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can enter a specific DIP address in dotted decimal notation DIP Mask When Network is selected for the destination IP filter you can ICMP Parameters Object enter a specific DIP mask in dotted decimal notation Description ICMP Type Filter Specify the ICMP filter for this ACE Any No ICMP filter is specified ICMP filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP value A field for entering an ICMP value appears ICMP Type Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP filter you can enter a specific ICMP value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP value GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 177 Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description ICMP Code Filter Specify the ICMP code filter for this ACE Any No ICMP code filter
174. fied VLAN of the frame the frame is discarded By default ingress filtering is disabled no checkmark Accept Frame Type Determines whether the port accepts all frames or only tagged frames This parameter affects VLAN ingress processing If the port only accepts tagged frames untagged frames received on the port are discarded By default the field is set to All Link Type Allow 802 1Q Untagged or Tagged VLAN for selected port When adding a VLAN to selected port it tells the switch whether to keep or remove the tag from a frame on egress Untag outgoing frames without VLAN Tagged Tagged outgoing frames with VLAN Tagged Q in O Mode Sets the Managed Switch to QinQ mode and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured The default is for the Managed Switch to function in Disable mode Disable The port operates in its normal VLAN mode This is the default MAN Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for an uplink port to another device within the service provider network Customer Port Configures IEEE 802 1Q tunneling QinQ for a client access port to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service provider network Set Out layer VLAN tag ether type The Tag Protocol Identifier TPID specifies the ethertype of incoming packets on a tunnel access port 802 1Q Tag 8100 VMAN Tag 88A8 Default 802 19 Tag NOTE The port must be a member of the same VLAN as th
175. for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU for 20 seconds a port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state 108 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 128 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the root port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 200 000 100Mbps Fast Ethernet STP calculates path costs and selects ports the path with the minimum cost as the 20 000 1000Mbps Gigabit geie porh Ethernet ports 0 Auto Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Default Value Enable state STP disabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 0 Bridge Priority 32 768 User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it
176. forwarded to the provider port with a single VLAN tag Tagged frames received on a subscriber port are forwarded to the provider port with a double VLAN tag VLAN ID is a 12 bit field specifying the VLAN to which the frame belongs 352 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual
177. forwarding this decision to the supplicant the switch uses it to open up or block traffic on the switch port connected to the supplicant Overview of MAC Based Authentication Unlike 802 1X MAC based authentication is not a standard but merely a best practices method adopted by the industry In MAC based authentication users are called clients and the switch acts as the supplicant on behalf of clients The initial frame any kind of frame sent by a client is snooped by the switch which in turn uses the client s MAC address as both username and password in the subsequent EAP exchange with the RADIUS server The 6 byte MAC address is converted to a string on the following form xx xx xx xx xx xx that is a dash is used as separator between the lower cased hexadecimal digits The switch only supports the MD5 Challenge authentication method so the RADIUS server must be configured accordingly When authentication is complete the RADIUS server sends a success or failure indication which in turn causes the switch to open up or block traffic for that particular client using static entries into the MAC Table Only then will frames from the client be forwarded on the switch There are no EAPOL frames involved in this authentication and therefore MAC based Authentication has nothing to do with the 802 1X standard GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 145 Chapter 4 Web based Management The advantage of MAC based authentication o
178. from a partner speak if spoken to LACP System Status This page provides a status overview for all LACP instances The LACP Status page displays the current LACP aggregation Groups and LACP Port status The LACP System Status screen in Figure 4 42 appears Figure 4 42 LACP System Status page screenshot LACP System Status Partner Partner Last Local AQgr ID SystemID Key Changed Ports No ports enabled or no extsting partners Auto refresh C Refresh GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 87 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Aggr ID The Aggregation ID associated with this aggregation instance For LLAG the id is shown as isid aggr id and for GLAGs as aggr id Partner System ID The system ID MAC address of the aggregation partner Partner Key The Key that the partner has assigned to this aggregation ID Last changed The time since this aggregation changed Local Ports Shows which ports are a part of this aggregation for this switch stack The format is Switch ID Port LACP Port Status This page provides a status overview for LACP status for all ports The LACP Port Status screen in Figure 4 43 appears Figure 4 43 LACP Port Status page screenshot LACP Port Status for Switch 1 Port LACP Key Aggr ID lt Poriner Parner 1 No 2 No 3 No Auto refresh C Refresh 88 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and
179. gacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 19 VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Some relevant terms Tagging The act of putting 802 1Q VLAN information into the header of a packet Untagging The act of stripping 802 1Q VLAN information out of the packet header 802 19 VLAN Tags The figure below shows the 802 1Q VLAN tag There are four additional octets inserted after the source MAC address Their presence is indicated by a value of 0x8100 in the Ether Type field When a packet s Ether Type field is equal to 0x8100 the packet carries the IEEE 802 10 802 1p tag The tag is contained in the following two octets and consists of 3 bits of user priority 1 bit of Canonical Format Identifier CFI used for encapsulating Token Ring packets so they can be carried across Ethernet backbones and 12 bits of VLAN ID VID The 3 bits of user priority are used by 802 1p The VID is the VLAN identifier and is used by th
180. ge Frames can be classified by up to 4 different QoS classes Low Normal Medium and High The classification is controlled by a QCL assigned to each port 122 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management A QCL consists of an ordered list of up to 12 QCEs Each QCE can be used to classify certain frames to a specific QoS Class This classification can be based on parameters such as VLAN ID UDP TCP port IPv4 IPv6 DSCP or Tag Priority Frames not matching any of the QCEs are classified to the default QoS Class for the port The QCE Configuration screen in Figure 4 58 appears Figure 4 58 QoS Configuration page screenshot QCE Configuration QCE Type Ethernet Type Y Ethernet Type Value SUCuC Sse VLAN ID Trattic Class TCP UDP Port DSCP ToS Tag Priority This page includes the following fields Object Description QCE Type Select the available type for the specific QCE Ethernet Type Matches the received frame s EtherType against the QCE Key VLAN ID Matches the frame s VID against the QCE Key TCP UDP Port Matches the destination port and the source port against the QCE Key DSCP Matches the received IPv4 IPv6 DSCP value 6 bits against the two DSCP values in the QCE Key ToS Uses the precedence part of the IPv4 IPv6 ToS 3 bits as an index to the eight QoS Class values in the QCE Key Tag Priority Uses the User Priority value 3 bits as an index to the
181. ge header The Port QoS Configuration screen in Figure 4 59 appears 124 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 59 Port QoS Configuration page screenshot 2 BARAA AA elelelelelelelelels ele S lt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 BARARARI E i lt I lt lt i ARAARA oo z HARAAA aelel This page includes the following fields Number of Classes Configure the number of traffic classes as 1 2 or 4 The default value is 4 Port The logical port for the settings contained in the same row Default Class Configure the default QoS class for the port that is the QoS class for frames not matching any of the QCEs in the QCL QCL Select which QCL to use for the port User Priority Select the default user priority for this port when adding a Tag to the untagged frames GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 125 Chapter 4 Web based Management Queuing Mode Select which Queuing mode for this port Queue Weighted Setting Queue weighted Low Normal Medium High if the Queuing Mode is Weighted QCL Configuration Wizard This handy wizard helps you set up a QCL quickly The QCL Configuration Wizard screen in Figure 4 60 appears Figure 4 60 Port QoS Configuration page screenshot Welcome to the QCL Configuration Wizard Please select an
182. ge allows you to configure RSTP system settings The settings are used by all RSTP Bridge instances in the Switch or switch Stack The Managed Switch support the following Spanning Tree protocols Compatible Spanning Tree Protocol STP Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops Normal Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops The RSTP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 52 appears Figure 4 52 RSTP System Configuration page screenshot RSTP System Configuration System Priority 32768 Max Age 20 Forward Delay 15 Protocol Version Normal bd 112 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description System Priority A value used to represent the priority component of a Bridge Identifier Max Age The maximum age of the information transmitted by the Bridge when it is the Root Bridge Valid values are in the range 6 to 200 seconds Default 20 Minimum The higher of 6 or 2 x Hello Time 1 Maximum The lower of 40 or 2 x Forward Delay 1 Forward Delay The delay used by STP Bridges to transition Root and Designated Ports to Forwarding used in STP compatible mode Valid values are in the range 4 to 30 seconds Default 15 Minimum The higher of 4 o
183. ged go Welcome to GE Security Command Line Interface Port Numbers t t a at tetetete ee tn tt 2 4i 6i 8i 1101211416 51820522 24 Pampas fPaah panpanpanponp panpan ponpant ponp ponp ponp ponp 11 3 St 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 21i 122 123 124 panpan panpanp panpangpanpant panpan pananpaong S254 paap paot ponp Password _ Connected 00 39 34 ANSIW 115200 8 N 1 NOTE 1 For security reasons please change and memorize the new password after this first setup 2 Only enter commands in lowercase letter in the console interface Configure IP address The GE DSG GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch is shipped with default IP address as following IP Address 192 168 0 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 To check the current IP address or modify a new IP address for the Switch please use the procedures as follow Show the current IP address 1 On Switch gt prompt enter show ip 236 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 5 Command Line Interface 2 The screen displays the current IP address Subnet Mask and Gateway As show in Figure 5 2 Figure 5 2 Show IP information screen COM1_115200 HyperTerminal Be ER ew Sal Darter tsb he os 29 amp Completed no errors fis load managed 190 Welcome to GE Security Command Line Interface Port Numbers i 2i 4i 6i 8i i 1i 3i 5i 7i a 4 4 A N 110112116116 9111113115 4
184. ged objects are defined in specific MIB modules e Network management protocol A management protocol is used to convey management information between agents and NMSs SNMP is the Internet community s de facto standard management protocol SNMP Overview SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol NMSs can send multiple requests without receiving a response e Get Allows the NMS to retrieve an object instance from the agent e Set Allows the NMS to set values for object instances within an agent e Trap Used by the agent to asynchronously inform the NMS of some event The SNMPv2 trap message is designed to replace the SNMPv1 trap message SNMP Community An SNMP community is the group that devices and management stations running SNMP belong to It helps define where information is sent The community name is GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 63 Chapter 4 Web based Management used to identify the group A SNMP device or agent may belong to more than one SNMP community It will not respond to requests from management stations that do not belong to one of its communities SNMP default communities are e Write private e Read public SNMP System Configuration Configure SNMP on this page The SNMP System Configuration screen in Figure 4 23 appears Figure 4 23 SNMP System Configuration page screenshot SNMP System Configuration Mode Enabled ba Version SNMP v2c g Read Community public
185. get system froze crashed or rebooted ICMP DoS Smurf A malicious attacker sending a malformed ICMP request packet with broadcast destination addresses to the target system After receiving the packet all reachable hosts send an ICMP echo reply packet back to the spoofed source address Thus the target host will suffer from a larger amount of traffic generated 190 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules According to your decision on the previous page this wizard will create specific ACEs Access Control Entries automatically First select the ingress port for the ACEs and then select the action rate limiter ID logging and shutdown Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected Figure 4 105 Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules page screenshot Set up DoS Attack Detection Rules According to your decision on the previous page this wizard will create specific ACEs Access Control Entries automatically First select the ingress port for these ACEs and then select the action rate limiter ID logging and shutdown Different parameter options are displayed depending on your selections IngressPort Any 9 Switch Aay fd Action Deny bal Disabled v Enabled Ba Disabled Cancel Wizard lt Back Next gt This page includes the following fields Object Description Ingress Port Select
186. gt m GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 239 Chapter 5 Command Line Interface 240 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode The CLI groups all the commands in appropriate modes according to the nature of the command A sample of the CLI command modes are described below Each of the command modes supports specific software commands Command Groups System System settings and reset options IP IP configuration and Ping Port Port management Aggr Link Aggregation LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Dot1x IEEE 802 1X port authentication IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol snooping LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol MAC MAC address table VLAN Virtual LAN PVLAN Private VLAN Qos Quality of Service ACL Access Control List Mirror Port mirroring SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Stack Stack management Firmware Download of firmware via TFTP GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode System Command System Configuration Description Show system configuration Syntax System Configuration all lt port_list gt Parameters all Show all switch configuration default Show system configuration lt port_list gt Port list or all default All port Example To display system information Switch gt syste
187. hapter 4 Web based Management EEE 802 10 VLAN Maximum VLAN ID Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this Managed Switch Maximum Number of Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on this Supported VLANs Managed Switch Current number of Display the current number of VLANs VLANs VLAN Learning Display the VLAN learning mode The Managed Switch supports IVL IVL Independent vian learning VLAN Port Configuration This page is used for configuring the Managed Switch port VLAN The VLAN per Port Configuration page contains fields for managing ports that are part of a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the VLAN Port Configuration page All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Understand nomenclature of the Switch e EEE 802 10 Tagged and Untagged Every port on an 802 10 compliant switch can be configured as tagged or untagged Tagged Ports with tagging enabled will put the VID number priority and other VLAN information into the header of all packets that flow into those ports If a packet has previously been tagged the port will not alter the packet thus keeping the VLAN information intact The VLAN information in the tag can then be used by other 802 1Q compliant devices on the network to make packet forwarding decisions Untagged Ports with untagging enabled will strip the 802 1Q tag from all packets that flow into those ports If the packet does
188. he CLI prompt string Syntax System Prompt lt prompt gt Parameters lt prompt gt CLI prompt string Default Setting SWITCH Example To change CLI title Switch gt system prompt GE DSSG 244 GE DSSG 244 gt 244 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode System Password Description Set or show the system password Syntax System Password lt password gt Parameters lt password gt System password or clear to clear Default Setting admin Example To set password Switch gt system password admin System SNTP Description Set or show the SNTP Time server address Syntax System SNTP lt ip_addr gt Parameters lt ip_addr gt IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set SNTP server SWITCH gt system sntp 220 130 158 52 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 245 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode System Timezone Description Set or show the system timezone offset Syntax System Timezone lt offset gt Parameters lt offset gt Time zone offset in minutes 720 to 720 relative to UTC Default Setting 0 Example To set timezone Switch gt system timezone 0 System Firmware Load Description Load new firmware from TFTP server Syntax System Firmware Load lt ip_server gt lt file_name gt Parameters lt ip_server gt TFTP server IP address a b c d lt file_n
189. he VLAN make sure the box is unchecked By default no ports are members and all boxes are unchecked Adding a New VLAN Click to add a new VLAN ID An empty row is added to the table and the VLAN can be configured as needed Legal values for a VLAN ID are 1 through 4095 The VLAN is enabled on the selected stack switch unit when you click on Save The VLAN is thereafter present on the other stack switch units but with no port members A VLAN without any port members on any stack unit will be deleted when you click Save The button can be used to undo the addition of new VLANs Private VLAN Configuration Overview When a VLAN is configured to be a private VLAN communication between ports within that VLAN can be prevented Two application examples are provided in this section e Customers connected to an ISP can be members of the same VLAN but they are not allowed to communicate with each other within that VLAN e Servers in a farm of web servers in a Demilitarized Zone DMZ are allowed to communicate with the outside world and with database servers on the inside segment but are not allowed to communicate with each other GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 101 Chapter 4 Web based Management Promiscuous Promiscuous Permit Public Servers Access Deny Access Day Access Dany Private VLAN Or private VLANs to be applied the switch must first be configured for standard VLAN op
190. he fragment offset settings for this ACE This involves the settings for the More Fragments MF bit and the Fragment Offset FRAG OFFSET field for an IPv4 frame No IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the MF bit is set or the FRAG OFFSET field is greater than zero must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care IP Option Specify the options flag setting for this ACE No IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must not be able to match this entry Yes IPv4 frames where the options flag is set must be able to match this entry Any Any value is allowed don t care 176 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description SIP Filter Specify the source IP filter for this ACE Any No source IP filter is specified Source IP filter is don t care Host Source IP filter is set to Host Specify the source IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Source IP filter is set to Network Specify the source IP address and source IP mask in the SIP Address and SIP Mask fields that appear SIP Address When Host or Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a specific SIP address in dotted decimal notation SIP Mask When Network is selected for the source IP filter you can enter a speci
191. he hassle of manually assigning it a unique IP address DNS is an acronym for Domain Name System It stores and associates many types of information with domain names Most importantly DNS translates human friendly domain names and computer hostnames into computer friendly IP addresses For example the domain name www example com might translate to 192 168 0 1 DoS is an acronym for Denial of Service In a denial of service DoS attack an attacker attempts to prevent legitimate users from accessing information or services By targeting at network sites or network connection an attacker may be able to prevent network users from accessing email web sites online accounts banking etc or other services that rely on the affected computer Dotted Decimal Notation refers to a method of writing IP addresses using decimal numbers and dots as separators between octets An IPv4 dotted decimal address has the form x y z w where x y z and w are decimal numbers between 0 and 255 344 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Appendix B Glossary Term DSCP Ethernet Type FTP Fast Leave HTTP HTTPS Definition DSCP is an acronym for Differentiated Services Code Point It is a field in the header of IP packets for packet classification purposes Ethernet Type or EtherType is a field in the Ethernet MAC header defined by the Ethernet networking standard It is used to indicate which protocol is being transpor
192. he number of times the ACE was hit by a frame Modification Buttons You can modify each ACE Access Control Entry in the table using the following buttons nserts a new ACE before the current row Edits the ACE row Moves the ACE up the list Moves the ACE down the list Deletes the ACE The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the ACE listings ACE Configuration Configure an ACE Access Control Entry on this page An ACE consists of several parameters These parameters vary according to the frame type that you select First select the ingress port for the ACE and then select the frame type Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 171 Chapter 4 Web based Management A frame that hits this ACE matches the configuration that is defined here Object Description Ingress Port Select the ingress port for which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Port n The ACE applies to this port number where n is the number of the switch port Policy n The ACE applies to this policy number where n can range from 1 through 8 Switch Select the switch to which this ACE applies Any The ACE applies to any port Switch n The ACE applies to this switch number where n is the number of the switch Frame Type Select the frame type for this ACE Any Any frame can mat
193. he transmitting port is connected to a tag unaware device the packet should be untagged If the transmitting port is connected to a tag aware device the packet should be tagged Default VLANs The Switch initially configures one VLAN VID 1 called default The factory default setting assigns all ports on the Switch to the default As new VLAN are configured in Port based mode their respective member ports are removed from the default Assigning Ports to VLANs Before enabling VLANs for the switch you must first assign each port to the VLAN groupls in which it will participate By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as untagged ports Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or more VLANs and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs Then assign ports on the other VLAN aware network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN s either manually or dynamically using GVRP However if you want a port on this switch to participate in one or more VLANs but none of the intermediate network devices nor the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs then you should add this port to the VLAN as an untagged port NOTE VLAN tagged frames can pass through VLAN aware or VLAN unaware network interconnection devices but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it on to any end node host that does not support VLA
194. hen the frame type is Ethernet Type or ARP Specify the source MAC filter for this ACE Any No SMAC filter is specified SMAC filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific source MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering an SMAC value appears SMAC Value When Specific is selected for the SMAC filter you can enter a specific source MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this SMAC value DMAC Filter Specify the destination MAC filter for this ACE Any No DMAC filter is specified DMAC filter status is don t care MC Frame must be multicast BC Frame must be broadcast UC Frame must be unicast Specific If you want to filter a specific destination MAC address with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a DMAC value appears DMAC Value VLAN Parameters Object When Specific is selected for the DMAC filter you can enter a specific destination MAC address The legal format is xx xx xx xx xx xx A frame that hits this ACE matches this DMAC value Description VLAN ID Filter Specify the VLAN ID filter for this ACE Any No VLAN ID filter is specified VLAN ID filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific VLAN ID with this ACE choose this value A field for entering a VLAN ID number appears VLAN ID When Specific is selected for the VLAN ID fi
195. hout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states e Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets e Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state e Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets e Forwarding the port is forwarding packets e Disabled the port only responds to network management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows e From initialization switch boot to blocking e From blocking to listening or to disabled e From listening to learning or to disabled e From learning to forwarding or to disabled e From forwarding to disabled e From disabled to blocking 106 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 49 STP Port State Transitions Forwarding You can modify each port state by using management sof
196. icast The number of received and transmitted good and bad unicast packets Rx and Tx Multicast The number of received and transmitted good and bad multicast packets Rx and Tx Broadcast The number of received and transmitted good and bad broadcast packets Rx and Tx Pause A count of the MAC Control frames received or transmitted on this port that have an opcode indicating a PAUSE operation Receive and Transmit Size Counters The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets split into categories based on their respective frame sizes Receive and Transmit Queue Counters The number of received and transmitted packets per input and output queue Receive Error Counters Object Description Rx Drops The number of frames dropped due to lack of receiving buffers or egress congestion Rx CRC Alignment The number of frames received with CRC or alignment errors Rx Undersize The number of shortframes received with valid CRC Rx Oversize The number of long frames received with valid CRC Rx Fragments The number of short frames received with invalid CRC Rx Jabber The number of long2 frames received with invalid CRC Rx Filtered The number of received frames filtered by the forwarding process Short frames are frames that are smaller than 64 bytes Long frames are frames that are longer than the configured maximum frame length for this port GE D
197. icast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network 136 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Multicast Receiver Switch Figure 4 69 Multicast Service Multicast Transmitter IPTV Server Sepsis uta om a Receiver Figure 4 70 Multicast flooding Multicast Receiver Multicast Transmitter SS hia jer l J G mm Server Beg Switch Router Switch S Switch Multicast Receiver vx N oO mutica GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 137 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 71 IGMP Snooping multicast stream control Multicast Receiver Multicast 7 IGMP Snooping Transmitter Switch IGMP Snooping A Switch Cie k Oy i IPTV Server IGMP Snooping Switch Cc lt IGMP Snooping Multicast Switch Receiver Multicast Receiver IGMP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 16 31 Type Response Ti
198. ics Syntax MAC Statistics lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports 310 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Set all of MAC statistics SWITCH gt mac statistics MAC Flash Description Flush all learned entries Syntax MAC Flush GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 311 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode LLDP Command LLDP Configuration Description Show LLDP configuration Syntax LLDP Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDP Mode Description Set or show LLDP mode Syntax LLDP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable rx tx Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LLDP reception and transmission disable Disable LLDP rx Enable LLDP reception only tx Enable LLDP transmission only default Show LLDP mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable port1 LLDP function SWITCH gt lldp mode 1 enable 312 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode LLDP Optional TLV Description Show Set LLDP Optional TLVs Syntax LLDP Optional_TLV lt port_list gt port_descr sys_name sys_descr sys_capa mgmt_addr enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports port_descr Description of the p
199. idge Status Active Ports The number switch ports active in the RSTP bridge instance aggregated ports count only as one Bridge ID The Bridge ID of this Bridge instance Root ID The Bridge ID of the currently elected root bridge Root Port The switch port currently assigned the root port role Root Cost Root Path Cost For the Root Bridge this is zero For all other Bridges it is the sum of the Port Path Costs on the least cost path to the Root Bridge Topology Flag 114 The current state of the Topology Change Flag for this Bridge instance GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management RSTP Port Configuration This page allows the user to inspect the current RSTP port configurations and possibly change them as well This page contains settings for aggregations and physical ports The aggregation settings are stack global The RSTP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Figure 4 54 RSTP Port Configuration interface ooann ic OoOoOo0O00o0OoOo00F0000000000000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 12 B 4 15 16 7 B 19 20 z 2 23 24 HESS SHS HSHESHSES GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 115 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Port The switch port number of the logical RSTP port RSTP Ena
200. ion server requesting identity information from the client verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP resp
201. iption Object Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save View Name A string identifying the view name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 View Type Indicates the view type that this entry should belong to Possible view type are included An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be included excluded An optional flag to indicate that this view subtree should be excluded General if a view entry s view type is excluded it should be exist another view entry which view type is included and it s OID subtree overstep the excluded view entry OID Subtree The OID defining the root of the subtree to add to the named view The allowed OID length is 1 to 128 The allowed string content is digital number or asterisk 72 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Port Management Use the Port Menu to display or configure the Managed Switch s ports This section has the following items Port Configuration Port Statistics Mirror Port Configuration Port Configuration This page displays current port configurations Ports can also be configured here The port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Chapter 4 Web based Management Configures port connection settings Lists Etherne
202. is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from 0 to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 109 Chapter 4 Web based Management NOTE The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state NOTE Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters e Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 seco
203. is specified ICMP code filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific ICMP code filter with this ACE you can enter a specific ICMP code value A field for entering an ICMP code value appears ICMP Code Value When Specific is selected for the ICMP code filter you can enter a specific ICMP code value The allowed range is 0 to 255 A frame that hits this ACE matches this ICMP code value TCP UDP Parameters Object Description TCP UDP Source Filter Specify the TCP UDP source filter for this ACE Any No TCP UDP source filter is specified TCP UDP source filter status is don t care Specific If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears Range If you want to filter a specific TCP UDP source range filter with this ACE you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value A field for entering a TCP UDP source value appears TCP UDP Source No When Specific is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source value The allowed range is O to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UDP source value TCP UDP Source Range When Range is selected for the TCP UDP source filter you can enter a specific TCP UDP source range value The allowed range is 0 to 65535 A frame that hits this ACE matches this TCP UD
204. isabled J Disabled SJ Disabled EJ 0 15 1 Permit g Disabled J Disabled FJ Disabled FJ Disabled 9 0 16 16 Pemt J Disabled Ej Disabled J Disabled Disabled K3 0 17 1 Permit A Disabled kj Disabled J Disabled J Disabled 0 18 1E Permit amp Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J 0 19 1 Permit A Disabled J Disabled FJ Disabled J Disabled EJ 0 20 1 Pemi Disabled EJ Disabled J Disabled FJ Disabled EJ 0 21 1 Pem g Disabled J Disabled FJ Disabled FJ Disabled J 0 2 ME Permit Disabled Disabled d Disabled KJ Disabled 9 0 2 ME Pemt amp Disabled Disabled amp Disabled J Disabled K 0 24 1 Pem g Disabled J Disabled J Disabled J Disabled KJ 0 See 196 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Aging Configuration Object Description Disable Automatic Enables disables the automatic aging of dynamic entries Aging Aging Time The time after which a learned entry is discarded By default dynamic entries are removed from the MAC after 300 seconds This removal is also called aging Range 10 10000000 seconds Default 300 seconds Static MAC Table Configuration The static entries in the MAC table are shown in this table The static MAC table can contain 64 entries The maximum of 64 entries is for the whole stack and not per switch The MAC table is sorted first by VLAN ID and then by MAC address The Static MAC Table Configuration screen in Figure 4 110 appears
205. isplayed VLAN MAC address pairs as a basis for the next lookup When the end is reached the text no more entries is shown in the displayed table Use the lt lt button to start over MAC Table Columns Object Description Type Indicates whether the entry is a static or dynamic entry VLAN The VLAN ID of the entry MAC address The MAC address of the entry Port Members The ports that are members of the entry Buttons Auto refresh _ Check this box to enable an automatic refresh of the page at regular intervals Refreshe Refreshes the displayed table starting from the Start from MAC address and VLAN input fields Clear Flushes all dynamic entries lt lt Updates the table starting from the first entry in the MAC Table i e the entry with the lowest VLAN ID and MAC address gt gt Updates the table starting with the entry after the last entry currently displayed GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 199 Chapter 4 Web based Management Port Security Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port When port security is enabled on a port the Managed Switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table will be authoriz
206. istration Console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe these methods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Console Management Figure 3 1 Console management Setup Managed Switch PC Workstation with Terminal emulation software z Y SS Serial Port Ma 115200 8 n 1 Serial Port 9N Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the Managed Switch console serial port When using this management method a straight DB9 RS 232 cable is required to connect the switch to the PC 1 Click START then Programs Accessories and then Hyper Terminal When the following screen appears make sure that the COM port should be configured as e 115200 bps e 8data bits e No parity e 1stop bit GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 37 Chapter 3 Switch Management Figure 3 2 COM1 Properties window COM1 Properties Port Settings Bit
207. it Description Set or show LLDP reinit delay Syntax LLDP Reinit lt reinit gt Parameters lt reinit gt LLDP reinit delay 1 10 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP reinit delay value in 3 SWITCH gt lldp reinit 3 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 315 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode LLDP Information Description Show LLDP neighbor device information Syntax LLDP Info lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports LLDP Statistics Description Show LLDP Statistics Syntax LLDP Statistics lt port_list gt clear Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports clear Clear LLDP statistics 316 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Stack Management Command Stack List Description Show the list of switches in stack Syntax Stack List detailed productinfo Parameters detailed Show detailed information Stack List Description Set the master election priority Syntax Stack Master Priority lt sid gt local lt mst_elect_prio gt Parameters lt sid gt local Switch ID 1 16 or local switch lt mst_elect_prio gt Master election priority 1 4 1 gt Highest master probability Example Set low priority for switch2 SWITCH gt stack master priority 2 4 Stack Master Reelect Description Force master reelection ignoring master time Sy
208. ity that is configured in the management interface Master LED GE DSSG 244 Series only If master switch is fail or disconnected to the switch by stack port the switch with least switch ID will become master GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 17 Chapter 2 Installation LED Indications The front panel LEDs indicates instant status of port links data activity system operation Stack status and system power helps monitor and troubleshoot when needed The front panel LEDs are shown in Figures 2 4 through 2 6 Figure 2 4 GE DSG 244 LED indication GE DSG 244 amp Pa 112i M E i Beet FWE System Nap Color Function Lights to indicate that the Switch has power 10 at 1000Base T interfaces Color Function Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 1000Mbps 1000 Blink To indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data Green over that port LNK ACT Off If 10 100 LNK ACT LED is light it indicates that the port is operating at LOMbps or 100Mbps If 10 100 LNK ACT LED is Off it indicates that the port is link down Lights To indicate the link through that port is successfully established with speed 10Mbps or 100Mbps Blink To indicate that the switch is eae aa sending or receiving data 10 100 Orange over that eae aa Off If 1000 LNK ACT LED is light it indicates that the port is operating at 1000Mbps LNK ACT If 1000 LNK ACT
209. l UDP and provides file writing and reading but it does not provides directory service and security features ToS is an acronym for Type of Service It is implemented as the IPv4 ToS priority control It is fully decoded to determine the priority from the 6 bit ToS field in the IP header The most significant 6 bits of the ToS field are fully decoded into 64 possibilities and the singular code that results is compared against the corresponding bit in the IPv4 ToS priority control bit 0 63 ALLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information Each of these pieces of information is known as TLV TLV is short for Type Length Value GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 351 Appendix B Glossary Term UDP User Priority V VLAN VLAN ID Definition UDP is an acronym for User Datagram Protocol It is a communications protocol that uses the Internet Protocol IP to exchange the messages between computers UDP is an alternative to the Transmission Control Protocol TCP that uses the Internet Protocol IP Unlike TCP UDP does not provide the service of dividing a message into packet datagrams and UDP doesn t provide reassembling and sequencing of the packets This means that the application program that uses UDP must be able to make sure that the entire message has arrived and is in the right order Network applications that want to save processing time because they have very small data units to exchange ma
210. le Diagnostics for Switch 1 Pea Stan Cable Status Port Pair A Length A PairB Length B Pair C Length C Pair D Length D Object Description Port The port where you are requesting Cable Diagnostics Cable Status Port Port number Pair The status of the cable pair Length The length in meters of the cable pair GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 209 Chapter 4 Web based Management Ping This page allows you to issue ICMP PING packets to troubleshoot IP connectivity issues After you press the START button 5 ICMP packets are transmitted and the sequence number and roundtrip time are displayed upon reception of a reply The page refreshes automatically until responses to all packets are received or until a timeout occurs The ICMP Ping screen in Figure 4 116 appears Figure 4 117 ICMP Ping page screenshot ICMP Ping IP Address 0 0 0 0 Ping Size 64 This page includes the following fields Object Description IP Address The destination IP Address Ping Size The payload size of the ICMP packet Values range from 8 bytes to 1400 bytes NOTE Be sure the target IP Address is within the same network subnet of the switch or you had setup the correct gateway IP address After field the parameter and press Start to execute the Ping function The Ping result shows at the next table 210 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Stacking GE DSSG 24
211. le and in order delivery of data from sender to receiver and distinguishes data for multiple connections by concurrent applications for example Web server and e mail server running on the same host The applications on networked hosts can use TCP to create connections to one another It is known as a connection oriented protocol which means that a connection is established and maintained until such time as the message or messages to be exchanged by the application programs at each end have been exchanged TCP is responsible for ensuring that a message is divided into the packets that IP manages and for reassembling the packets back into the complete message at the other end Common network applications that use TCP include the World Wide Web WWW e mail and File Transfer Protocol FTP TELNET is an acronym for TELetype NETwork It is a terminal emulation protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a virtual connection between TELNET server and TELNET client TELNET enables the client to control the server and communicate with other servers on the network To start a Telnet session the client user must log in to a server by entering a valid username and password Then the client user can enter commands through the Telnet program just as if they were entering commands directly on the server console TFTP is an acronym for Trivial File Transfer Protocol It is transfer protocol that uses the User Datagram Protoco
212. le spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements e Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups e Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree 104 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management e Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used e The unique switch identifier e The path cost to the root associated with each switch port e The port identifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contains the following information e The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch e The path cost to the root from the transmitting port e The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs res
213. les for Switch 1 Group ports into several types according to different QCL policies Port Members ect 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 OOOOH HHHHOHHHHHHHHHHHHOOO 2 OO0DDDDGCVODOODODOOO9O0O0C0OC0O000 3 OOCOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0OO0OO0O00000O0 4 O0ODODDODOCCOODODOOCOCCOCOO0O0O0000 5 OCOOOOOOOOOOOCOOOOO0O0OO0OO0OO0O0O 6 l0O 000O0 0000000 0r 0001000000 0 0 7T OOOO O0OO0OO0OOO0OO0OOO0OO0OO0OO0OO0O0O0O0OO0OO0O0O0O BB OODDDOODGOOOOOOO9O0OO0O0O00000 9 OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOO0OO0OO0O0000O0 DN LOO O00 O10 OL OO 0010 010 0 O1O701010 0 1 OODDDDDDDDODDDODDDODONOOOOOO 2 OODODOCDODODOCDOOCOCOOCCOCOOCOC0O00 3 ANNANANANANAANANANANANANAANND This page includes the following fields Object Description QCL ID Frames that hit this QCE are set to match this specific QCL Port Members A row of radio buttons for each port is displayed for each QCL ID To include a port in a QCL member click the radio button GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 127 Chapter 4 Web based Management Once the QCL configuration wizard is finished the below screen appears Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control STEP 1 Set up the specific QCL for different typical network application quality control by selecting the network application type for your rule Figure 4 62 Set up Typical Network Application Rules page screenshot 128 GE DS
214. llowed rate of broadcast and multicast frames Policy 3 for server ports Common server access only DHCP FTP Mail and WEB server Policy 4 for network ports Limit the allowed rate of TCP SYN flooding and ICMP flooding Policy 5 for guest ports Internet access only To continue click Next Set up Port Policies Group ports into several types according to different ACL policies These settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen in Figure 4 98 appears 182 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 98 Set up Port Policies page screenshot Set up Port Policies for Switch 1 Group ports into several categories according to different ACL policies for example Client ports work stations laptops Server ports DHCP Web file server Network ports routers switches and Guest ports laptops with Internet access only Port Members PolicyID 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 101112131415 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 2 1 Defaut OD OOO OOOO OOOOOGOOOOOOOOOO 2Cliett O00 000000000000000000000 3 Serer O00 0000000000000000 00000 4Netwk O 0000000000 0000000000000 5 Get COO 0000000 00000000000000 6 ooo0oo0oo0o0000000000000000000 7 OOODDODOCOCOCOCCOCOOCOCCCOOO0O0C0C0C0 8 O10101010 0 0101010101010101010 07070101 001010 This page includes the following fields Object Description Policy ID Frames that hit this ACE are
215. looding enable disable Parameters enable Enable IGMP flooding disable Disable IGMP flooding default Show IGMP flood mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable IGMP flooding function SWITCH gt igmp flooding enable IGMP Groups Description Show IGMP groups Syntax IGMP Groups lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 283 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode IGMP Status Description Show IGMP status Syntax IGMP Status lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Default Setting Disable Example Enable IGMP flooding function SWITCH gt igmp status 1 Querier Rx Tx Rx Rx Rx Rx VID Status Queries Queries V1 Reports V2 Reports V3 Reports V2 Leave 284 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Quality of Service Command QoS Configuration Description Show QoS Configuration Syntax QoS Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports QoS Classes Description Set or show the number of traffic classes Syntax QoS Classes lt class gt Parameters lt class gt Number of traffic classes 1 2 or 4 Default Setting 4 Example Set QoS classes 2 SWITCH gt qos classes 2 QoS Default Description Set or show the default port priority Syntax QoS Default lt port_list gt lt class gt GE DSG 2
216. lt Setting Action Permit Rate Limiter Disable Port Copy Disable Loading Disable Shut down Disable Example SWITCH gt acl action 17 24 deny 1 24 log shut ACL Policy Description Set or show the ACL port policy Syntax ACL Policy lt port_list gt lt policy gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 Default Setting 1 Example Set policy ID 8 for port 17 24 SWITCH gt acl policy 17 24 8 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 303 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode ACL Rate Description Set or show the ACL rate limiter Syntax ACL Rate lt rate_limiter_list gt lt packet_rate gt Parameters lt rate_limiter_list gt Rate limiter list 1 15 default All rate limiters lt packet_rate gt Rate in pps 1 2 4 512 1k 2k 4k 1024k Default Setting 1 Example 2 SWITCH gt acl rate 15 1024k ACL Add Description Add or modify Access Control Entry ACE If the ACE ID parameter lt ace_id gt is specified and an entry with this ACE ID already exists the ACE will be modified Otherwise a new ACE will be added If the ACE ID is not specified the next available ACE ID will be used If the next ACE ID parameter lt ace_id_next gt is specified the ACE will be placed before this ACE in the list If the next ACE ID is not specified the ACE will be placed last in the list If the Switch ke
217. lter you can enter a specific VLAN ID number The allowed range is 1 to 4095 A frame that hits this ACE matches this VLAN ID value Tag Priority Specify the tag priority for this ACE A frame that hits this ACE matches this tag priority The allowed number range is 0 to 7 The value Any means that no tag priority is specified tag priority is don t care GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 173 Chapter 4 Web based Management ARP Parameters The ARP parameters can be configured when Frame Type ARP is selected Object Description ARP RARP Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care ARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to ARP RARP Frame must have ARP RARP opcode set to RARP Other Frame has unknown ARP RARP Opcode flag Request Reply Specify the available ARP RARP opcode OP flag for this ACE Any No ARP RARP OP flag is specified OP is don t care Request Frame must have ARP Request or RARP Request OP flag set Reply Frame must have ARP Reply or RARP Reply OP flag Sender IP Filter Specify the sender IP filter for this ACE Any No sender IP filter is specified Sender IP filter is don t care Host Sender IP filter is set to Host Specify the sender IP address in the SIP Address field that appears Network Sender IP filter is set to Network Specify the sender IP address and sender IP
218. m allowable power per port GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 225 Chapter 4 Web based Management Reserved Power determined by There are five modes for configuring how the ports PDs may reserve power and when to shut down ports Classification mode In this mode each port automatic determines how much power to reserve according to the class the connected PD belongs to and reserves the power accordingly Three different port classes exist and one for 4 7 and 15 4 Watts Class Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD Defaut oa to 1295 Watts Optional oad to 384 Watts Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Watts Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Watts or to 15 4Watts Not Allowed _ Reserved for Future Use NOTE In this mode the Maximum Power fields have no effect Allocation mode In this mode the user allocates the amount of power that each port may reserve The allocated reserved power for each port PD is specified in the Maximum Power fields The ports are shut down when total reserved powered exceeds the amount of power that the power supply can deliver NOTE In this mode the port power is not turned on if the PD requests more power the available Auto mode The Power Management function will automatically select the mode of operation according to the following sequence e Port class if available e Power allocation if available e Port power consumption 226 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web
219. m configuration System Name GE DSSG 244 System Password admin CLI Prompt Switch Timezone Offset 0 MAC Address 00 30 4f 24 04 03 System Time 1970 01 01 03 13 21 0000 System Uptime 03 13 21 SID Software Version 3 Beta_080813 System Reboot Description Reboot the system Syntax System Reboot 242 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example To reboot device without changing any of the settings Switch gt system reboot System Restore Default Description Restore factory default configuration Syntax System Restore Default keep_ip Parameters keep_ip Keep IP configuration default Restore full configuration Example To restore default value but not reset IP address Switch gt system restore default keep_ip System Name Description Set or show the system name Syntax System Name lt name gt Parameters lt name gt System name or clear to clear System name is a text string drawn from the alphabet A Za z digits 0 9 minus sign No blank or space characters are permitted as part of a name The first character must be an alpha character and the first or last character must not be a minus sign Default Setting GE DSG 244 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 243 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example To set device title Switch gt System name GE DSG 244 LAB System Prompt Description Set t
220. management interface to continue the switch management or manage the Managed Switch by Web interface The Switch Menu on the left of the web page let you access all the commands and statistics the Managed Switch provides NOTE e tis recommended to use Internet Explorer 6 0 or above to access Managed Switch e Achanged IP address takes effect immediately after clicking on the Save button and you will need to use the new IP address to access the Web interface e For security reasons please change and memorize the new password after this first setup e Only enter commands in lowercase letters in the web interface Main Web Page The GE DSG GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing it This interface allows you to access the Managed Switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the Managed Switch s Web browser interface to configure and manage it GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 45 Chapter 4 Web based Management Copper Port Link Status SFP Port Link Status Figure 4 4 Main page GE DSSG 244 1 M GE DSSG 244 J B System amp SNMP me S Welcome to GE Security amp Link Aggregation amp VLAN u Spanning Tree GE DSSG 244 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 24 SFP X Authentication A agement Switch Main Functions Menu B Diagnostics amp Stack Copyright 2009 GE Security Corporation All rights r
221. management mode Example SWITCH gt poe mgmt_mode Power management mode Power management mode automode 322 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode PoE Maximum_Power Description Set or show PoE maximum power per port 0 15 4 with one digit Syntax PoE Maximum_Power lt port_list gt lt port_power gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt port_power gt PoE maiximum power for the port 0 15 4 PoE Alloc_Power Description PoE Alloc_Power lt port_list gt lt alloc_power gt Syntax PoE Mgmt_mode mgt_class mgt_alloc mgt_auto mgt_consumption mgt_priority Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt alloc_power gt PoE maiximum power allocated for the port 0 15 4 PoE Power_Supply Description Set or show the value of the power supply Syntax PoE Power_Supply lt supply_power gt Parameters lt supply_power gt PoE power for a power supply GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 323 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Description Show PoE status Syntax PoE Status Example 324 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 325 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode 326 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 7 Switch Operation Address Table The Switch is impl
222. me Checksum Group Address all zeros if this is a query 138 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management The IGMP Type codes are shown below Type Meaning 0x11 Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 0x11 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present 0x16 Membership Report version 2 0x17 Leave a Group version 2 0x12 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave message and quer
223. med DEFAULT_VLAN As new VLAN is created the member ports assigned to the new VLAN will be removed from the DEFAULT_ VLAN port member list The DEFAULT_VLAN has a VID 1 This section has the following items IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Enable IEEE 802 1Q Tag based VLAN group IEEE 802 1Q Tunneling Enables 802 19 QinQ Tunneling Private VLAN Creates removes primary or community VLANs IEEE 802 1Q VLAN In large networks routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into separate domains This Managed Switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains VLANs confine broadcast traffic to the originating group and can eliminate broadcast storms in large networks This also provides a more secure and cleaner network environment An IEEE 802 1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a new VLAN without having to change any physical connections VLANs can be easily organized to reflect departmental groups such as Marketing or R amp D usage groups such as e mail or multicast groups used for multimedia applications such as videoconferencing VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic and allow you to make network changes without having to update IP addre
224. method to guarantee a bandwidth relationship between individual applications or protocols A communications network transports a multitude of applications and data including high quality video and delay sensitive data such as real time voice Networks must provide secure predictable measurable and sometimes guaranteed services Achieving the required QoS becomes the secret to a successful end to end business solution Therefore QoS is the set of techniques to manage network resources RARP is an acronym for Reverse Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that is used to obtain an IP address for a given hardware address such as an Ethernet address RARP is the complement of ARP GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 349 Appendix B Glossary Term Router Port SAMBA SHA Shaper SMTP SNMP SNTP SPROUT Definition A router port is a port on the Ethernet switch that leads switch towards the Layer 3 multicast device RSTP In 1998 the IEEE with document 802 1w introduced an evolution of STP the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol which provides for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change Standard IEEE 802 1D 2004 now incorporates RSTP and obsoletes STP while at the same time being backwards compatible with STP Samba is a program running under UNIX like operating systems that provides seamless integration between UNIX and Microsoft Windows machines Samba acts as file and print ser
225. mode until PD s power consumption lower than the power limit value Note The system PoE mode have to set to Allocation mode then it effect GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management NOTE For GE DSSG 244 POE the total PoE power reservation from Port 1 24 is up to 220W PD Classifications A PD may be classified by the PSE based on the classification information provided by the PD The intent of PD classification is to provide information about the maximum power required by the PD during operation Class 0 is the default for PDs However to improve power management at the PSE the PD may opt to provide a signature for Class 1 to 3 The PD is classified based on power The classification of the PD is the maximum power that the PD will draw across all input voltages and operational modes A PD shall return Class 0 to 3 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4 4 Table 4 4 Device class Class Usage Range of maximum power used by the PD 0 Default 0 44 to 12 95 Watts 1 Optional 0 44 to 3 84 Watts 2 Optional 3 84 to 6 49 Watts 3 Optional 6 49 to 12 95 Watts 4 Not Allowed Reserved for Future Use NOTE Class 4 is defined but is reserved for future use A compliant PD cannot provide a Class 4 signature PoE Status This page allows the user to inspect the total power consumption total power reserved and current status for all PoE ports
226. n Set or show the IGMP snooping querier mode for VLAN Syntax IGMP Querier lt vid gt enable disable Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default Show all VLANs enable Enable IGMP querier disable Disable IGMP querier default Show IGMP querier mode Default Setting Disable Example SWITCH gt igmp querier 1 enable GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 281 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode IGMP Fast Leave Description Set or show the IGMP snooping fast leave port mode Syntax IGMP Fastleave lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IGMP fast leave disable Disable IGMP fast leave default Show IGMP fast leave mode Default Setting Disable Example SWITCH gt igmp fastleave 1 enable IGMP Router Description Set or show the IGMP snooping router port mode Syntax IGMP Router lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable IGMP router port disable Disable IGMP router port default Show IGMP router port mode Default Setting Disable 282 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Enable IGMP snooping function for port1 4 SWITCH gt igmp router 1 4 enable IGMP Flooding Description Set or show the IGMP snooping unregistered flood operation Syntax IGMP F
227. n Port Copy Select which port frames are copied to The allowed values are Disabled or a specific port number The default value is Disabled Logging Specify the logging operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled Frames received on the port are stored in the System Log Disabled Frames received on the port are not logged The default value is Disabled Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown Specify the port shut down operation of this port The allowed values are Enabled If a frame is received on the port the port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled The default value is Disabled Counter Counts the number of frames that match this ACE GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 195 Chapter 4 Web based Management Address Table Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The Managed Switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The network administrator configures the static entries if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC t
228. n mode to one of the following options only used when 802 1X or MAC based authentication is globally enabled Auto Requires an 802 1X aware client supplicant to be authorized by the authentication server Clients that are not 802 1X aware will be denied access Authorized Forces the port to grant access to all clients 802 1X aware or not The switch transmits an EAPOL Success frame when the port links up GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 153 Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Unauthorized Forces the port to deny access to all clients 802 1X aware or not The switch transmits an EAPOL Failure frame when the port links up MAC Based Enables MAC based authentication on the port The switch doesn t transmit or accept EAPOL frames on the port Flooded frames and broadcast traffic will be transmitted on the port whether or not clients are authenticated on the port whereas unicast traffic against an unsuccessfully authenticated client will be dropped Clients that are not yet successfully authenticated will not be allowed to transmit frames of any kind Port State The current state of the port It can undertake one of the following values 802 1X Disabled 802 1X and MAC based authentication is globally disabled Link Down 802 1X or MAC based authentication is enabled but there is no link on the port Authorized The port is authorized This is the case when 802 1X authen
229. n t have an 802 1Q VLAN tag the port will not alter the packet Thus all packets received by and forwarded by an untagging port will have no 802 1Q VLAN information Remember that the PVID is only used internally within the Switch Untagging is used to send packets from an 802 1Q compliant network device to a non compliant network device rame Income 4 Income Frame i Income Frame is un Erame Leave come Frame is tagged come Frame is untagged Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Tag is removed Frame remain untagged 96 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management IEEE 802 19 Tunneling Q in Q IEEE 802 10 Tunneling QinQ is designed for service providers carrying traffic for multiple customers across their networks QinQ tunneling is used to maintain customer specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different customers use the same internal VLAN IDs This is accomplished by inserting Service Provider VLAN SPVLAN tags into the customer s frames when they enter the service provider s network and then stripping the tags when the frames leave the network A service provider s customers may have specific requirements for their internal VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported VLAN ranges required by different customers in the same service provider network might easily overlap and traffic passing through the infr
230. nd e Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 240 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 200000000 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in the below diagram In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Bridge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using 110 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 Po
231. nly on master priority and MAC address When master election is enforced the first two criteria are ignored for a period of 10 15 seconds Master Forwarding Table As the heading suggests the information in the table is as seen from the master view For each switch in the stack the following information is shown e The MAC address switch ID distance information and the primary forwarding path to the switch e For ring topology a backup path is also provided Figure 4 126 Stack Information page screenshot Master Forwarding Table Master Forwarding Table Oe pistance Forwarding Stack Member Switch ID oe j ee Port 25 Port 26 Port 25 Port 26 00 30 4 76 26 93 1 0 0 Local Local 00 30 4f 76 c4 2b 2 1 Primary 00 30 24 24 24 3 2 Primary Auto refresh C GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 219 Chapter 4 Web based Management Stack Port State Overview This page provides an overview of the current switch port states Clicking on the image of a port opens the Port Statistics page The port states are illustrated as follows Figure 4 127 Port State Overview page screenshot hESC TERE EGU RE A Port State Overview gE ETE Stack Example Stacking function is convenient for administrator to manage multiple switches by single IP Basically you got to have min 2 units The GE DSSG 244 series Switch supports auto stack configuration Once the stack cable is connect to
232. nse Identity RADIUS Accs Regest EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Chalkenge EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Raquest _ T EAP Succ ss RADIUS Access Accept EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1xX enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 149 Chapter 4 Web based Management If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Acce
233. ntax Stack Master Reelect GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 317 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Stack Select Description Set or show the selected switch ID Syntax Stack Select lt sid gt all Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 default Show SID Example Select switch2 to management switch2 SWITCH gt stack select 2 Stack SID Swap Description Swap SID values used to identify two switches Syntax Stack SID Swap lt sid gt lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 Example Swap switch ID 1 and 2 SWITCH gt stack sid swap 2 1 318 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Stack SID Delete Description Delete SID assignment and associated configuration Syntax Stack SID Delete lt sid gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 Stack SID Assign Description Assign SID and associated configuration to switch SID must be unassigned switch must be present and switch must not already be assigned to a SID Syntax Stack SID Assign lt sid gt lt mac_addr gt Parameters lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx xx XX XX Xx Example Assign SID2 for switch that use MAC address 00 30 4f 24 04 76 SWITCH gt stack sid assign 2 00 30 4f 24 04 76 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 319 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Power over Ethernet Command PoE Configuration Description Show
234. nterval specified by the Reauthentication Period Reauthentication for 802 1x enabled ports can be used to detect if a new device is plugged into a switch port For MAC based ports reauthentication is only useful if the RADIUS server configuration has changed It does not involve communication between the switch and the client and therefore doesn t imply that a client is still present on a port see Age Period below Reauthentication Period Determines the period in seconds after which a connected client must be reauthenticated This is only active if the Reauthentication Enabled checkbox is checked Valid values are in the range 1 to 3600 seconds GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 151 Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description EAP Timeout Determines the time the switch shall wait for the supplicant response before retransmitting a packet Valid values are in the range 1 to 255 seconds This has no effect for MAC based ports Age Period This setting applies to ports running MAC based authentication only Suppose a client is connected to a 3rd party switch or hub which in turn is connected to a port on this switch that runs MAC based authentication and suppose the client gets successfully authenticated Now assume that the client powers down his PC What should make the switch forget about the authenticated client Reauthentication will not solve this problem since this doesn t require the cli
235. o mirrerte Switch 1 Mirror Port Configuration for Switch 1 Port Mode 1 Disabled KJ Disabled 9 Disabled J Disabled a Disabled g 6 Disabled 3 7 Disabled K 8 Disabled 9 9 Disabled 9 14 Disabled amp Disabled Q 16 Disabled 9 17 Disabled E 18 Disabled A Disabled 3 Disabled K Disabled K Disabled D Disabled EJ Disabled EJ Reset we Ses wee This page includes the following fields Object Description Switch to mirror to Frames from ports that have either source or destination mirroring enabled are mirrored to this switch SFP Module Information You can check the physical or operational status of an SFP module via the SFP Module Information page This page shows the operational status such as the transceiver type speed wavelength and supports distance of SFP module on a specific interface You can also use the hyperlink of the port number to check the statistics on a specific interface 80 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 37 SFP Module Information page screenshot SFP Module Information for Switch 1 Port Type Speed Wave Length nm Distance m 1 JID RA He er ne We Rot RS BS BS Kes tes PS tex KAR IEIS roo wot Auto efresh C Refresh This page includes the following fields Object Description Type Display the type of current SFP module the possible types are 1000Base Sx 1000Base LXx 100
236. ocality Indicates the aggregation group type This field is only valid for stackable switches Global The group members may reside on different units in the stack The device supports two 8 port global aggregations Local The group members reside on the same unit Each local aggregation may consist of up to 16 members Group ID Indicates the group ID for the settings contained in the same row Group ID Normal indicates there is no aggregation Only one group ID is valid per port Port Members Each switch port is listed for each group ID Select a radio button to GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 85 Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description include a port in an aggregation or clear the radio button to remove the port from the aggregation By default no ports belong to any aggregation group LACP Configuration Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP LACP LAG negotiate Aggregated Port links with other LACP ports located on a different device LACP allows switches connected to each other to discover automatically whether any ports are member of the same LAG This page allows the user to inspect the current LACP port configurations and possibly change them as well The LACP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The LACP Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 41 appears Figure 4 41 LACP Port Configuration page screenshot LACP Port
237. of Received Querier V1 Reports Receive The number of Received V1 Reports V2 Reports Receive The number of Received V2 Reports V3 Reports Receive The number of Received V3 Reports V2 Leave Receive The number of Received V2 Leave GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 143 Chapter 4 Web based Management Multicast Address Table The Multicast Address Table screen in Figure 4 76 appears Figure 4 76 Multicast Address Table page screenshot MAC Address Table for Switch 1 Start from VLAN 1 and MAC address 00 00 00 00 00 00 with 20 entries per page Autoreresh CI Refresh Clear ic lt gt gt Type VLAN MAC Address cpu 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ST1 ST2 Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Static Dynamic Dynamic Dynamic Static 00 02 B3 EC 9D CF Vv 00 08 B6 00 06 90 v 00 OE A6 O0F 8B 92 y 00 30 4F 76 26 93 v 00 30 4F 80 20 01 00 30 4F 80 20 08 08 00 46 6A 1F 90 FF FF FF FF FF FF V V V V VVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVVV VV a lt ie This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save VLAN ID The VLAN ID for the entry MAC Address The MAC address for the entry Port Members 144 Checkmarks indicate which ports are members of the entry
238. ole management SNMP Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the standard management protocol for multi vendor IP networks SNMP supports transaction based queries that allow the protocol to format messages and to transmit information between reporting devices and data collection programs SNMP runs on top of the User Datagram Protocol UDP offering a connectionless mode service Management Architecture All of the management application modules use the same Messaging Application Programming Interface MAPI By unifying management methods with a single MAPI configuration parameters set using one method console port for example are immediately displayable by the other management methods for example SNMP agent of Web browser The management architecture of the switch adheres to the IEEE open standard This compliance assures customers that the Managed Switch is compatible with and will interoperate with other solutions that adhere to the same open standard GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 41 Chapter 3 Switch Management 42 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web Based Management This section introduces the configuration and functions of the Web Based management About Web based Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer Th
239. on Product Features e Physical Port o GE DSG 244 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 4 mini GBIC SFP slots shared with Port 21 to Port 24 RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup o GE DSSG 244 POE 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 with IEEE 802 3af PoE Injector 4 mini GBIC SFP slots shared with Port 21 to Port 24 RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup 2 High performance 5GbE Stacking interface24 Port 10 100Base TX RJ 45 with PoE Injector o GE DSSG 244 24 100 1000Base X mini GBIC SFP slots 8 Port 10 100 1000Base T Gigabit Ethernet RJ 45 shared with Port 1 to Port 8 RS 232 DB9 console interface for Switch basic management and setup 2 High performance 5GbE Stacking interface e Layer 2 Features O Complies with the IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 3u IEEE 802 3ab IEEE 802 3z Gigabit Ethernet standard Supports Auto negotiation and half duplex full duplex modes for all 10Base T 100Base TX and 1000Base T ports Auto MDI MDI X detection for each RJ 45 port Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex High performance of Store and Forward architecture broadcast storm control and runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth 8K MAC address table automatic source address learning and ageing 1392Kbytes embedded memory for packet buffers Suppor
240. onse identity frame GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 147 Chapter 4 Web based Management However if during boot up the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity NOTE If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Figure 4 78 shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 148 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 78 EAP message exchange Authentication Server Client B02 1 Switch i RADIUS o EAPOL Start EAF Ragquest Identity EAP Respo
241. oogle Talk MSN Messenger Yahoo Messenger User Definition Indicates the user definition that applies to the specific ACE The user definitions are Ethernet Type Specify the Ethernet Type filter for this ACE The allowed range is 0x600 to OxFFFF UDP Port Specify the UDP destination port filter for this ACE The allowed range is 0 to 65535 TCP Port Specify the TCP destination port filter for this ACE The 184 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description allowed range is 0 to 65535 Others Indicates the other application that applies to the specific ACE The other applications are HTTPS ICMP Multicast IP Stream NetBIOS PING Request Ping Reply SNMP SNMP Traps STEP 2 Define and Apply the Typical Network Application Rules According to your decision on the previous page this wizard will create specific ACEs Access Control Entries automatically First select the ingress port for the ACEs and then select the action rate limiter ID logging and shutdown Different parameter options are displayed depending on the frame type that you selected The screen in Figure 4 100 appears Figure 4 100 Set up Typical network Application Rules screenshot Set up Typical Network Application Rules According to your decision on the previous page this wizard will create specific ACEs Access Control Entries automatically First select the ingress port for
242. or checking with the network administrator Or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance 2 Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently 3 Turn the handle of the MGB module to horizontal 4 Pull out the module gently through the handle 28 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2 15 Pulling out the SFP transceiver CAUTION Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Pulling out the module with too much force could damage the module and SFP module slot of the Managed Switch Stack Installation GE DSSG 244 The GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch provides a switch stacking function to manage up to 16 switches using a single IP address And up to 384 Gigabit Ethernet ports can be managed by a stacking group and you can add ports and functionality as needed You can add GE DSSG 244 series switches as needed to support more network clients Knowing that your switching fabric will scale to meet increasing traffic demands Two types of stack topologies are supported by the GE DSSG 244 series e Chain topology same as a disconnected ring e Ring topology Please see the following figure for a sample connection GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 29 Chapter 2 Installation Figure 2 16 Chain Stack topology Connecting Stacking cable Before attempting to connect stacking ports
243. ore and Forward is one type of packet forwarding techniques A Store and Forward Ethernet Switching stores the incoming frame in an internal buffer do the complete error checking before transmission Therefore no error packets occurrence it is the best choice when a network needs efficiency and stability The Ethernet Switch scans the destination address from the packet header searches the routing table pro vided for the incoming port and forwards the packet only if required The fast forwarding makes the switch attractive for connecting servers directly to the network thereby increasing throughput and availability However the switch is most commonly used to segment existence hubs which nearly always improves overall performance An Ethernet Switching can be easily configured in any Ethernet network environment to significantly boost bandwidth using conventional cabling and adapters Due to the learning function of the Ethernet switching the source address and corresponding port number of each incoming and outgoing packet are stored in a routing table This information is subsequently used to filter packets whose destination address is on the same segment as the source address This confines network traffic to its respective domain and reduce the overall load on the network The Switch performs Store and forward therefore no error packets occur More reliably it reduces the re transmission rate No packet loss will occur Auto Negotia
244. ort sysm_name System name sys_descr Description of the system sys capa System capabilities mgmt_addr Master s IP address default Show optional TLV s configuration enable Enables TLV disable Disable TLV default Show optional TLV s configuration Default Setting Description of the port Enable System name Enable Description of the system Enable System capabilities Enable Master s IP address Enable Example Disable description of the port for port1 SWITCH gt lldp optional_tlv 1 port_descr disable GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 313 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode LLDP Interval Description Set or show LLDP Tx interval Syntax LLDP Interval lt interval gt Parameters lt interval gt LLDP transmission interval 5 32768 Default Setting 30 Example Set transmission interval in 10 SWITCH gt lldp interval 10 LLDP Hold Description Set or show LLDP Tx hold value Syntax LLDP Hold lt hold gt Parameters lt hold gt LLDP hold value 2 10 Default Setting 3 Example Set LLDP hold value in 10 SWITCH gt lldp hold 10 314 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode LLDP Delay Description Set or show LLDP Tx delay Syntax LLDP Delay lt delay gt Parameters lt delay gt LLDP transmission delay 1 8192 Default Setting 2 Example Set LLDP delay value in 1 SWITCH gt lldp delay 1 LLDP Rein
245. ort egress scheduler mode Syntax QoS Mode lt port_list gt strict weighted Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Strict Strict mode weighted Weighted mode default Show QoS mode Default Setting Strict Example Set weighted mode for port15 SWITCH gt qos mode 15 weighted QoS Weight Description Set or show the port egress scheduler weight GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 289 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Syntax QoS Weight lt port_list gt lt class gt lt weight gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt class gt Traffic class low normal medium high or 1 2 3 4 lt weight gt Traffic class weight 1 2 4 8 QoS Rate Limiter Description Set or show the port rate limiter Syntax QoS Rate Limiter lt port_list gt enable disable lt bit_rate gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable rate limiter disable Disable rate limiter default Show rate limiter mode lt bit_rate gt Rate in 1000 bits per second 500 1000000 kbps Default Setting Disabled 500kbps Example Set 1000kbps rate limiter for port17 24 SWITCH gt qos rate limiter 17 24 enable 1000 QoS Shaper Description Set or show the port shaper 290 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Syntax QoS Shaper lt port_list gt
246. page The entry index key are Group Name Security Model and Security Level The SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration screen in Figure 4 26 appears Figure 4 26 SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration page screenshot SNMPv3 Accesses Configuration Delete Group Name Security Model Security Level Read View Name Write View Name o default_ro_group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view a None M default_rw_group any NoAuth NoPriv default_view D default_view J Add new access Save Reset GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 67 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Delete Check to delete the entry It will be deleted during the next save Group Name A string identifying the group name that this entry should belong to The allowed string length is 1 to 32 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Security Model Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are any Accepted any security model v1 v2clusm v1 Reserved for SNMPv1 v2c Reserved for SNMPv2c usm User based Security Model USM Security Level Indicates the security model that this entry should belong to Possible security models are NoAuth NoPriv None authentication and none privacy Auth NoPriv Authentication and none privacy Auth Priv Authentication and privacy Read View N
247. phic hash function with a 128 bit hash value It was designed by Ron Rivest in 1991 MD5 is officially defined in RFC 1321 The MD5 Message Digest Algorithm For debugging network problems or monitoring network traffic the switch system can be configured to mirror frames from multiple ports to a mirror port In this context mirroring a frame is the same as copying the frame Both incoming source and outgoing destination frames can be mirrored to the mirror port GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 347 Appendix B Glossary Term NetBIOS NFS Optional TLVs PING Policer Definition NetBIOS is an acronym for Network Basic Input Output System It is a program that allows applications on separate computers to communicate within a Local Area Network LAN and it is not supported on a Wide Area Network WAN The NetBIOS giving each computer in the network both a NetBIOS name and an IP address corresponding to a different host name provides the session and transport services described in the Open Systems Interconnection OSI model NFS is an acronym for Network File System It allows hosts to mount partitions on a remote system and use them as though they are local file systems NFS allows the system administrator to store resources in a central location on the network providing authorized users continuous access to them which means NFS supports sharing of files printers and other resources as persist
248. placed or removed without disrupting normal operation The broken link is bypassed and data transmission continues uninterrupted The single management IP address for the stack is also preserved for uninterrupted management and monitoring Figure 4 121 Remove or Replace a switch from the stack 5 E me ba rs rei ba l frai ri Y c ANA nO o gt amp 2m mr Nyra i EA ATA LAW LADY OS c 5 amp GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 215 Chapter 4 Web based Management Shortest Path Forwarding The GE DSSG 244 series switch supports shortest path forwarding technology to optimal data flow across the stack The advantage of shortest path forwarding as below Automatic Loop Prevention Using Time To Live TTL information in the stack header Utilize all stack links in the ring Figure 4 122 True Ring Topology Switch 1 Load per stack link C gt Switch 2 Switch 3 Stack Configuration This page is used to configure the stack include assign Switch ID master priority and display the current stack member information The screen in Figure 4 123 appears 216 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 123 Stack Configuration page screenshot Stack Configuration Master eaen Stack Member Switch ID e o Description Switch Type 00 30 ar 76 26 93 1 v Yes 3m GE DSSG 244 PoE GE Security GE DSSG
249. pt frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retried If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized state 802 1X System Configuration This page allows you to configure the IEEE 802 1X and MAC based authentication system and port settings The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a port based access control procedure that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit credentials for authentication A central server the RADIUS server determines whether the user is allowed access to the network MAC based authentication allows for authentication of more than one user on the same port and doesn t require the user to have special 802 1X software installed on his system The Managed Switch uses the user s MAC address to authenticate against the RADIUS server Intruders can create counter
250. ption Source MAC Address The Source MAC address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the Source MAC address or uncheck to disable By default Source MAC Address is enabled Destination MAC The Destination MAC Address can be used to calculate the Address destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the 84 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Destination MAC Address or uncheck to disable By default Destination MAC Address is disabled IP Address The IP address can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the IP Address or uncheck to disable By default IP Address is enabled TCP UDP Port Number The TCP UDP port number can be used to calculate the destination port for the frame Check to enable the use of the TCP UDP Port Number or uncheck to disable By default TCP UDP Port Number is enabled Static Aggregation Group Configuration The Aggregation Group Configuration screen in Figure 4 40 appears Figure 4 40 Aggregation Group Configuration page screenshot Aggregation Group Configuration for Switch 1 Port Members Locality Group ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Global Global Local Normal 1 1 Save Reset This page includes the following fields Object Description L
251. ption Set or show the RSTP system priority Syntax RSTP SysPrio lt sys_prio gt 272 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt sys_prio gt RSTP system priority 0 4096 8192 57344 61440 Default Setting 32768 Example Set RSTP system priority value in 4096 SWITCH gt rstp sysprio 4096 RSTP Age Description Set or show the RSTP maximum age Syntax RSTP Age lt max_age gt Parameters lt max_age gt RSTP maximum age time 6 200 Default Setting 20 Example Set RSTP maximum age time in 200 SWITCH gt rstp age 200 RSTP Delay Description Set or show the RSTP forward delay Syntax RSTP Delay lt delay gt GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 273 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt delay gt RSTP forward delay 4 30 Default Setting 15 Example Set RSTP forward delay value in 25 SWITCH gt rstp delay 25 RSTP Version Description Set or show the RSTP protocol version Syntax RSTP Version compatible normal Parameters compatible Compatible with STP normal RSTP Default Setting Normal Example Change RSTP version in compatible SWITCH gt rstp version compatible RSTP Mode Description Set or show the RSTP mode Syntax RSTP Mode lt port_list gt enable disable 274 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Parameters lt port_list g
252. r Max Message Age 2 1 Maximum 30 Protocol Version The STP compatibility mode setting Normal Rapid STP 802 1w Detects and uses of network topologies that provide faster spanning tree convergence without creating forwarding loops Compatible Classis STP 802 1d Provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops NOTE The Gigabit Ethernet Switch implement the Rapid Spanning Protocol as the default spanning tree protocol While select Compatibles mode the system uses the RSTP 802 1w to be compatible with and co work with another STP 802 1d s BPDU control packets RSTP Bridge Status This page provides a status overview for all RSTP bridge instances The displayed table contains a row for each RSTP bridge instance where the column displays the following information The RSTP Bridge Status screen in Figure 4 53 appears GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 113 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 53 RSTP Bridge Status page screenshot RSTP Bridge Status Root VLAN ID Active Ports Bridge ID 7 Topology Flag 1D Porti Cost 4 0 32769 00 30 4f 24 24 24 32769 00 30 4f 24 24 24 0 Steady 0 0 32768 00 30 4f 24 24 24 32768 00 30 4f 24 24 24 0 Steady Auto refresh O This page includes the following fields Object Description VLAN ID The VLAN ID associated with this Bridge instance This is also a link to the RSTP Detailed Br
253. r Description Clear all ACL counters Syntax ACL Clear 306 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode MAC Address Table Command MAC Configuration Description Show MAC address table configuration Syntax MAC Configuration lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Example Show port1 Mac state SWITCH gt mac configuration 1 MAC Age Time 300 Mac Add Description Add MAC address table entry Syntax MAC Add lt mac_addr gt lt port_list gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx XX XX XX Xx lt port_list gt Port list or all or none lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 307 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Add Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in port1 and vid1 SWITCH gt mac add 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 1 MAC Delete Description Delete MAC address entry Syntax MAC Delete lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx xx XX Xx Xx lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1 Example Delete Mac address 00 30 4F 01 01 02 in vid1 SWITCH gt mac delete 00 30 4f 01 01 02 1 MAC Lookup Description Lookup MAC address entry Syntax MAC Lookup lt mac_addr gt lt vid gt Parameters lt mac_addr gt MAC address xx xx xx XX XX Xx lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 default 1
254. r client right most table Possible retransmissions are not counted 159 Chapter 4 Web based Management Last Supplicant Client Info For MAC based ports this section is embedded in the RADIUS counter s section Information about the last supplicant client that attempted to authenticate Last Supplicant Client Info Sven nome O Port based The protocol version number carried in the most recently dotixAuthLastEapolFrameVer aceived EAPOL frame MAC based Not applicable Port based The source MAC address carried in the most recently received dot1xAuthLastEapolFrameSo EAPOL frame urce Port based The user name supplicant identity carried in the most recently received Resp ID EAPOL frame MAC based The MAC address of the last client that attempted to authenticate left most table or the MAC address of the currently selected client right most table or Last Client Clients attached to this port This table is only available for MAC based ports Each row in the table represents a MAC based client on the port and there are three parameters for each client e MAC Address Shows the MAC address of the client which is also used as the password in the authentication process against the RADIUS server Clicking the link causes the client s RADIUS counters to be shown in the right most RADIUS counters table above If no clients are attached it shows No clients attached e State Shows whether the
255. r this row Link The current link state is displayed graphically Green indicates the link is up and red that it is down Current Link Speed Provides the current link speed of the port Configured Link Speed Select any available link speed for the given switch port Draw the menu bar to select the mode Auto Speed Setup Auto negotiation 10half Force sets L1OMbps Half Duplex mode 10 Full Force sets 10Mbps Full Duplex mode 100 half Force sets 100Mbps Half Duplex mode 100 full Force sets 100Mbps Full Duplex mode 1000 full Force sets 10000Mbps Full Duplex mode Disable Shutdown the port manually Flow Control When Auto Speed is selected for a port this section indicates the flow control capability that is advertised to the link partner When a fixed speed setting is selected that is what is used Current Rx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are obeyed Current Tx column indicates whether pause frames on the port are transmitted The Rx and Tx settings are determined by the result of the last Auto Negotiation Check the configured column to use flow control This setting is related to the setting for Configured Link Speed Maximum Frame Enter the maximum frame size allowed for the switch port including FCS The allowed range is 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes Excessive Collision Mode Configure port transmit collision behavior Discard Discard frame after 16 collision
256. ransceiver Single mode 1310nm 20km GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 27 Chapter 2 Installation NOTE It is recommended that only approved GE Security SFP transceivers be used on the Managed Switch If you insert an SFP transceiver that is not supported the Switch may not recognize it Before connecting the other switches workstations or Media Converter 1 Make sure both sides of the SFP transceiver are the same media type for example 1000Base Sx to 1000Base SxX 1000Bas Lx to 1000Base Lx 2 Verify that the fiber optic cable type matches the SFP transceiver model e To connect to the 1000Base SXxX SFP transceiver use multi mode fiber cable one side must be male duplex LC connector type e To connect to 1000Base LX SFP transceiver use single mode fiber cable one side must be male duplex LC connector type Connect the fiber cable 1 Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 4 Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Co works with some fiber NICs or Media Converters set the Link mode to 1000 Force is needed Remove the transceiver module 1 Make sure there is no network activity by consulting
257. ration 327 Chapter 8 Power Over Ethernet Overview 329 Chapter 9 Troubleshooting 335 Appendix A RJ 45 Pin Assignment 339 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments 339 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX 340 Appendix B Glossary 343 ii GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction GE DSSG 244 PoE The GE Security Layer 2 Managed Gigabit Switch series the GE DSG 244 and GE DSSG 244 series switches are all multiple port Gigabit Ethernet Switched with SFP fiber optical connective ability and robust layer 2 features The description of these models is below IGE DSG 244 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T with 4 Shared SFP Managed Gigabit Switch GRDNA 24 Port 10 100 1000Base T PoE Managed Stackable Switch IGE DSSG 244 24 Port 100 1000Base x with 8 Shared TP Managed Stackable Switch GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction Package Contents What s in the box Open the Managed Switch box and carefully unpack it The box should contain the following items The Managed Switch x1 User s Manual CD x1 Installation Sheet x1 Two rack mounting brackets with attachment screws X2 Power cord x1 Rubber feet X4 RS 232 cable x1 CB STX50 50cm stack cable x1 GE DSSG 244 Series only If any of these items are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately If possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them to rep
258. re public Figure 3 5 SNMP management setup Managed Switch SNMP Agent Status Enabled ties decide PC Workstation ae Ee with o ne a sae ae eS wwe SNMP application Reet IIT o o n Internets IP Adress Intranet 192 168 0 100 IP Adress 192 168 0 x Protocols The Managed Switch supports the following protocols e Virtual terminal protocols such as Telnet e Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP Virtual Terminal Protocols Telnet A virtual terminal protocol is a software program such as Telnet that allows you to establish a management session from a Macintosh a PC or a UNIX workstation Because Telnet runs over TCP IP you must have at least one IP address configured on the Managed Switch before you can establish access to it with a virtual terminal protocol 40 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 3 Switch Management Terminal emulation differs from a virtual terminal protocol in that you must connect a terminal directly to the console serial port NOTE See the Installation Sheet that came with this product for a Telnet step by step procedure using Hyper Terminal To access the Managed Switch through a Telnet session 1 Be Sure of the Managed Switch is configured with an IP address and the Managed Switch is reachable from a PC 2 Start the Telnet program on a PC and connect to the Managed Switch The management interface is exactly the same with RS 232 cons
259. red according to a logical scheme rather than the physical layout VLAN can be used to combine any collection of LAN segments into an autonomous user group that appears as a single LAN VLAN also logically segment the network into different broadcast domains so that packets are forwarded only between ports within the VLAN Typically a VLAN corresponds to a particular subnet although not necessarily VLAN can enhance performance by conserving bandwidth and improve security by limiting traffic to specific domains A VLAN is a collection of end nodes grouped by logic instead of physical location End nodes that frequently communicate with each other are assigned to the same VLAN regardless of where they are physically on the network Logically a VLAN can be equated to a broadcast domain because broadcast packets are forwarded to only members of the VLAN on which the broadcast was initiated NOTES 1 No matter what basis is used to uniquely identify end nodes and assign these nodes VLAN membership packets cannot cross VLAN without a network device performing a routing function between the VLAN 2 The Managed Switch supports IEEE 802 1Q VLAN The port untagging function can be used to remove the 802 1 tag from packet headers to maintain compatibility with devices that are tag unaware 90 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management 3 The Switch s default is to assign all ports to a single 802 10 VLAN na
260. represented roughly by a three with thirty nine zeroes after it However IPv4 is still the protocol of choice for most of the Internet PMC is an acronym for IP MultiCast LACP is an IEEE 802 3ad standard protocol The Link Aggregation Control Protocol allows bundling several physical ports together to form a single logical port LLDP is an IEEE 802 1ab standard protocol The Link Layer Discovery Protocol is used for network discovery and works by having the units in the network exchanging information with their neighbors using LLDP frames Switching of frames is based upon the DMAC address contained in the frame The switch builds up a table that maps MAC addresses to switch ports for knowing which ports the frames should go to based upon the DMAC address in the frame This table contains both static and dynamic entries The static entries are configured by the network administrator if the administrator wants to do a fixed mapping between the DMAC address and switch ports The frames also contain a MAC address SMAC address which shows the MAC address of the equipment sending the frame The SMAC address is used by the switch to automatically update the MAC table with these dynamic MAC addresses Dynamic entries are removed from the MAC table if no frame with the corresponding SMAC address has been seen after a configurable age time MD5 is an acronym for Message Digest algorithm 5 MD5 is a message digest algorithm used cryptogra
261. s across your network You can define exactly how you want the switch to treat selected applications and types of traffic You can use QoS on your system to e Control a wide variety of network traffic by e Classifying traffic based on packet attributes e Assigning priorities to traffic for example to set higher priorities to time critical or business critical applications e Applying security policy through traffic filtering e Provide predictable throughput for multimedia applications such as video conferencing or voice over IP by minimizing delay and jitter e Improve performance for specific types of traffic and preserve performance as the amount of traffic grows e Reduce the need to constantly add bandwidth to the network e Manage network congestion QoS Terminology e Classifier classifies the traffic on the network Traffic classifications are determined by protocol application source destination and so on You can create and modify classifications The Switch then groups classified traffic in order to schedule them with the appropriate service level e DiffServ Code Point DSCP is the traffic prioritization bits within an IP header that are encoded by certain applications and or devices to indicate the level of service required by the packet across a network e Service Level defines the priority that will be given to a set of classified traffic You can create and modify service levels 120 GE DSG 244 DSSG
262. s default Restart Restart backoff algorithm after 16 collisions 74 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Power Control The Usage column shows the current percentage of the power consumption per port The Configured column allows for changing the power savings mode parameters per port Disabled All power savings mechanisms disabled ActiPHY Link down power savings enabled Dynamic Link up power savings enabled Enabled Link up and link down power savings enabled Total Power Usage Total power usage in board measured in percent NOTE When set each port to run at 100M Full 100M Half 10M Full and 10M Half speed modes The Auto MDIX function will disable Port Statistics Overview This page provides an overview of general traffic statistics for all switch ports The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The Port Statistics Overview screen in Figure 4 32 appears Figure 4 32 Port Statistics Overview page screenshot Port Statistics Overview for Switch 1 ez Packets Bytes Errors Drops Filtered l J Receive Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Transmit Receive 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 890 85 119654 52257 0 0 121 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 5202636 568702 730401984 276389608 3 0 3 0 7095 466314 5002757 199898909
263. s page includes the following fields Object Description QCL Select a QCL to display a table that lists all the QCEs for that particular QCL QCE Type Specifies which frame field the QCE processes to determine the QoS class of the frame The following QCE types are supported Ethernet Type The Ethernet Type field If frame is tagged this is the Ethernet Type that follows the tag header VLAN ID VLAN ID Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged TCP UDP Port IPv4 TCP UDP source destination port DSCP IPv4 and IPv6 DSCP ToS The 3 precedence bit in the ToS byte of the IPv4 IPv6 header also known as DS field Tag Priority User Priority Only applicable if the frame is VLAN tagged or priority tagged Type Value Indicates the value according to its QCE type Ethernet Type The field shows the Ethernet Type value VLAN ID The field shows the VLAN ID TCP UDP Port The field shows the TCP UDP port range DSCP The field shows the IPv4 IPv6 DSCP value Traffic Class The QoS class associated with the OCE Modification Buttons You can modify each QCE in the table using the following buttons nserts a new QCE before the current row Edits the QCE Moves the QCE up the list Moves the QCE down the list Deletes the OCE Q The lowest plus sign adds a new entry at the bottom of the list of QCL QoS Control Entry Configuration Configure a new QoS Control Entry on this pa
264. s per second eit v Data bits Parity Stop bits Flow control 2 Once the terminal has connected to the device power on the GE DSG series Managed Industrial Switch the terminal will display that it is running testing procedures 3 Then the system asks for the login password The factory default username and password is below The login screen appears User name admin Password admin You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 38 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 3 Switch Management Web Management The Managed Switch offers management features that allow users to manage the Managed Switch from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Microsoft Internet Explorer After you set up your IP address for the switch you can access the Managed Switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the Managed Switch You can then use your Web browser to list
265. scarded Each LLDP frame can contain multiple pieces of information known as TLVs TLV is short for Type Length Value If a TLV is malformed it is counted and discarded TLVs Unrecognized The number of well formed TLVs but with an unknown type value Org Discarded The number of organizationally TLVs received Age Outs 208 Each LLDP frame contains information about how long time the LLDP information is valid age out time If no new LLDP frame is received within the age out time the LLDP information is removed and the Age Out counter is incremented GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Network Diagnostics Cable Diagnostics This page is used for running the Cable Diagnostics Press to run the diagnostics This will take approximately 5 seconds If all ports are selected this can take approximately 15 seconds When completed the page refreshes automatically and you can view the cable diagnostics results in the cable status table Note that Cable Diagnostics is only accurate for cables of length 7 140 meters 10 and 100 Mbps ports will be linked down while running cable diagnostic Therefore running cable diagnostic on a 10 or 100 Mbps management port will cause the switch to stop responding until VeriPHY is complete The ports belong to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Figure 4 116 Cable Diagnostics page screenshot Cab
266. scribes access permission associated with a particular ACE ID There are three ACE frame types Ethernet Type ARP and IPv4 and two ACE actions permit and deny The ACE also contains many detailed different parameter options that are available for individual application Access Control List Configuration This page shows the Access Control List ACL which is made up of the ACEs defined for this Managed Switch Each row describes the ACE that is defined e The maximum number of ACEs is 128 e Click on the lowest plus sign to add a new ACE to the list GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 169 Chapter 4 Web based Management The Access Control List Configuration screen in Figure 4 95 appears Figure 4 95 Access Control List Configuration page screenshot Access Control List Configuration Ingress Port Frame Type Action Rate Limiter Port Copy Logging Shutdown Counter O Auto refresh This page includes the following fields Object Description Ingress Port Indicates the ingress port of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any ingress port Policy The ACE will match ingress ports with a specific policy Port The ACE will match a specific ingress port Frame Type Indicates the frame type of the ACE Possible values are Any The ACE will match any frame type EType The ACE will match Ethernet Type frames ARP The ACE will match ARP RARP frames Pv4 The ACE will match
267. set to match this specific policy Port Members To include a port in a policy member click the radio button A row of radio buttons for each port is displayed for each Policy ID Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control The screen in Figure 4 99 appears GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 183 Chapter 4 Web based Management STEP 1 Selecting the Network Application Type Figure 4 99 Set up Typical network Application Rules page screenshot Set up Typical Network Application Rules Set up the specific ACL for different typical network application access control by selecting the network application type for your rule o Common Servers OoHcp Cons OFP Omp Ciimap CINFs CPOP3 LISAMBA ISMTP TELNET LITFTIP o Instant Messaging C Google Talk JMSN Messenger C Yahoo Messenger o User Definition ClEthemet Type C UDP Pot ITCP Port o Others OHTPS icCMP Multicast IP Stream NetBIOS Ping Request C Ping Reply LJSNMP SNMP Traps Cancel Wizard lt Back Next gt This page includes the following fields Object Description Common Servers Indicates the common servers that applies to the specific ACE The common servers are DHCP DNS FTP HTTP IMAP NFS POP3 SAMBA SMTP TELNET TFTP Instant Messaging Indicates the instant messaging service that applies to the specific ACE The instant messengers are G
268. sses or IP subnets VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN This Managed Switch supports the following VLAN features e Upto 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard e Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging and GVRP protocol e Port overlapping allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 91 Chapter 4 Web based Management e End stations can belong to multiple VLANs e Passing traffic between VLAN aware and VLAN unaware devices e Priority tagging IEEE 802 1Q VLAN Standard IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 10 VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 10 VLAN allows VLAN to work with le
269. st changed at Shows the time for when the last entry was last deleted or added It is also shows the time elapsed since last change was detected Total Neighbors Entries Shows the number of new entries added since switch reboot Added Total Neighbors Entries Shows the number of new entries deleted since switch reboot Deleted Total Neighbors Entries Shows the number of LLDP frames dropped due to that the entry Dropped table was full Total Neighbors Entries Shows the number of entries deleted due to Time To Live expiring Aged Out Local Counters The displayed table contains a row for each port The columns hold the following information Object Description Local Port The port on which LLDP frames are received or transmitted Tx Frames The number of LLDP frames transmitted on the port Rx Frames The number of LLDP frames received on the port Rx Errors The number of received LLDP frames containing some kind of error Frames Discarded If an LLDP frame is received on a port and the switch s internal table has run full the LLDP frame is counted and discarded This situation is known as Too Many Neighbors in the LLDP standard LLDP frames require a new entry in the table when the Chassis ID or Remote Port ID is not already contained within the table Entries are removed from the table when a given port links down an LLDP shutdown frame is received or when the entry ages out TLVs Di
270. st gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable LACP protocol disable Disable LACP protocol default Show LACP mode Default Setting Disable Example Enable LACP for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp mode 1 4 enable LACP Key Description Set or show the LACP key Syntax LACP Key lt port_list gt lt key gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports lt key gt LACP key 1 65535 or auto Default Setting Auto 262 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Set key1 for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp key 1 4 1 LACP Role Description Set or show the LACP role Syntax LACP Role lt port_list gt active passive Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports active Initiate LACP negotiation passive Listen for LACP packets default Show LACP role Default Setting Active Example Set passive for port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp role 1 4 passive LACP Status Description Show LACP Status Syntax LACP Status lt port_list gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 263 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Show LACP status of port1 4 SWITCH gt lacp status 1 4 Aggr ID Partner System ID Partner Port Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
271. stack operation of the GE DSSG 244 series Managed Switch supports Plug and Play Stacking connection and auto stack configuration STEP 5 Once the stack start operation the Stack master is automatically elected without any configure A lit green Master LED on the front panel indicates the Stack master Figure 2 19 Stack Master with Master LED lit STEP 6 When a GE DSSG 244 series Switch is added to the stack a Switch ID is automatically assigned to the GE DSSG 244 series Switch Choosing a different Switch ID on the Stack Configuration page can modify the automatic SID assignment This method allows Switch IDs to be assigned so that it is easier for the user to remember the ID of each switch STEP 7 Connect the RS 232 serial cable to the console port on the front of the stack master and then login the GE DSSG 244 series Switch to start the switch management 32 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation NOTE The stack switch with least priority ID or MAC Address number will become Master Only Master switch s management interface console telnet web and SNMP is accessible It s allowed to build a stack of up to 16 GE Security GE DSSG 244 series Switches If there is the space limitation or power issue and you wish to stack all the switches in different racks use long stack cables CB STX200 to connect two stacks Figure 2 20 Separated Stack connection gt p
272. stem Log Disabled Frames matching the ACE are not logged Please note that the System Log memory size and logging rate is limited Shutdown 186 Specify the port shut down operation of the ACE The allowed values are Enabled If a frame matches the ACE the ingress port will be disabled Disabled Port shut down is disabled for the ACE GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual The ACL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use Figure 4 101 Set up Typical network Application Rules screenshot Access Control List Configuration Chapter 4 Web based Management IPv4 UDP 67 DHCP Client In Disabled IPv4 UDP 67 DHCP Client Out Disabled IPv4 TCP 5222 Google Talk In Disabled IPv4 TCP 5222 Google Talk Out Disabled EType Disabled IPv4 TCP 443 HTTPS In Disabled IPv4 TCP 443 HTTPS Out Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled C Auto refresh Set up Source MAC and Source IP Binding Strictly control the network traffic by only allowing incoming frames that match the source IP and source MAC on specific port The settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header The screen in Figure 4 102 appears GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled
273. t macbased auto authorized unauthorized Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports macbased_ Switch performs 802 1X authentication on behalf of the client auto Port access requires 802 1X authentication authorized Port access is allowed unauthorized Port access is not allowed default Show 802 1X state Default Setting Authorized GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 295 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Example Change IEEE802 1x mode in auto SWITCH gt dot1x state 1 auto Dot1x Server Description Set or show the RADIUS server IP address Syntax Dot1x Server lt ip_addr gt Parameters ip_addr RADIUS server IP address a b c d default Show IP address Default Setting 0 0 0 0 Example Set RADIUS server IP address for switch RADIUS server IP address is 192 168 0 254 SWITCH gt dot1x server 192 168 0 254 Dot1x Secret Description Set or show the secret shared with the RADIUS server Syntax Dot1x Secret lt shared_secret gt Parameters lt shared_secret gt Secret shared with external RADIUS server To set an empty secret use two quotes To use spaces in secret enquote the secret Quotes in the secret are not allowed default Show shared secret 296 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Default Setting empty Example Set authentication key 123abc in switch with the RADIUS server SW
274. t Port list or all Port zero means aggregations enable Enable RSTP protocol disable Disable RSTP protocol Default Setting Disable Example Enable rstp mode for port1 SWITCH gt rstp mode 1 enable RSTP Cost Description Set or show the RSTP path cost Syntax RSTP Cost lt port_list gt lt path_cost gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt path_cost gt RSTP path cost 1 2000000000 or auto Default Setting Auto Example Set RSTP cost value in 1 for port1 SWITCH gt rstp cost 1 1 RSTP Priority Description Set or show the RSTP priority GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 275 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode Syntax RSTP Priority lt port_list gt lt priority gt Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all Port zero means aggregations lt priority gt RSTP priority 0 16 32 48 224 240 Default Setting 128 Example Set RSTP priority value in 16 for port1 SWITCH gt rstp priority 1 16 RSTP Edge Description Set or show the RSTP edge parameter Syntax RSTP Edge lt port_list gt enable disable Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports enable Enable RSTP edge disable Disable RSTP edge Default Setting Enable Example Disable RSTP edge parameter for port1 SWITCH gt rstp edge 1 disable 276 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual
275. t The Detailed Port Statistics screen in Figure 4 33 appears Figure 4 33 Detailed Port Statistics Port 1 page screenshot Detailed Port Statistics for Switch 1 Port 1 Auto refresh C Refresh Clear Port 1 76 Receive Total Transmit Total Rx Packets 0 Tx Packets 0 Rx Octets 0 Tx Octets 0 Rx Unicast 0 Tx Unicast 0 Rx Multicast 0 Tx Multicast 0 Rx Broadcast 0 Tx Broadcast 0 Rx Pause 0 Tx Pause 0 Receive Size Counters Transmit Size Counters Rx 64 Bytes 0 Tx 64 Bytes 0 Rx 68 127 Bytes 0 Tx 65 127 Bytes 0 Rx 128 255 Bytes 0 Tx 128 255 Bytes 0 Rx 256 511 Bytes 0 Tx 256 511 Bytes 0 Rx 512 1023 Bytes 0 Tx 12 1023 Bytes 0 Rx 1024 1526 Bytes 0 Tx 1024 1526 Bytes 0 Rx 1527 Bytes 0 Tx 1527 Bytes 0 Receive Queve Counters Transmit Queve Counters Rx Low 0 Tx Low 0 Rx Normal 0 Tx Normal 0 Rx Medium 0 Tx Medium 0 Rx High 0 Tx High 0 Receive Error Counters Transmit Error Counters Rx Drops 0 Tx Drops 0 Rx CRC Alignment 0 Tx Late Exc Coll 0 Rx Undersize 0 Rx Oversize 0 Rx Fragments 0 Rx Jabber 0 Rr Filtered 0 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Receive Total and Transmit Total Object Description Rx and Tx Packets The number of received and transmitted good and bad packets Rx and Tx Octets The number of received and transmitted good and bad bytes Includes FCS but excludes framing bits Rx and Tx Un
276. t VLANs GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 1 Introduction IEEE 802 1Q Tagged VLAN Up to 255 VLANs groups out of 4041 VLAN IDs Provider Bridging VLAN Q in Q support IEEE 802 1ad Private VLAN Edge PVE o Support Spanning Tree Protocol STP IEEE 802 1D Classic Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP IEEE 802 1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol o Supports Link Aggregation Upto 13 Trunk groups Up to 8 ports per trunk group with 1 6Gbps bandwidth Full Duplex mode IEEE 802 3ad LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol Cisco ether Channel Static Trunk o Provide Port Mirror many to 1 o Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port Quality of Service o 4priority queues on all switch ports o Supports for strict priority and weighted round robin WRR CoS policies o Ingress Shaper and Egress Rate Limit per port bandwidth control o Traffic policing policies on the switch port Multicast o Supports IGMP Snooping v1 and v2 o Querier mode support Security o IEEE 802 1x Port Based MAC Based network access authentication o IP Based Access Control List ACL o MAC Based Access Control List Management o WEB based Telnet Console Command Line management o Accesses through SNMPv1 v2c and v3 security set and get requests Chapter 1 Introduction O O O O Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client
277. t and RMON port statistics Sets the source and target ports for mirroring The table has one row for each port on the selected switch in the stack and a number of columns which are The Port Configuration screen in Figure 4 31 appears Figure 4 31 Port Configuration page screenshot Port Configuration for Switch 1 Total Power Usage 47 Flow Control Port Unk Speed me I A 1 Dom aw 2 Dom Auto vi 3 Dom Auto 4 Dom awo 5s Dom Aww 6 Dom Auto 7 iOm Auto g s iG Auto v s Dom Auto 10 Dom Auto a 11 Dom Auto M n Dom Auo 13 Dom Auto u Dom auo g 15 Dom Auto 16 Dom Auto 17 Dom Auto 18 Dom auto 19 Dom Auto vi 2 Dom amw v 2 Dom Auo g n Dom Aaw i 23 Dom Auto 24 Dom awo iv Re k ORS r be od Ooh BS x DE kr DE r Ix DS XC DE LI ES LI EJS LI EI LI EI LI LI Li Eef Jef e fefefe ke fepe kep eRe e E EE E Configured Current Rx Current Tx Configured Frame 9600 9600 Cotision Mode usage Configured Discars FJ 41 Enables D Decard FJ 41 Enables EJ Discard J 41 Enables J Discard FZ 41 Enabled DJ Discard FP 41 Ensdea EJ Discard FJ 41 Enabled DJ Discard FJ 41 Enades E Discard Fj 92 Enadlea J GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Save T3 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description Port This is the logical port number fo
278. t2 SWITCH gt vlan linktype 2 tagged VLAN Q in Q Mode Description Set or show the port Q in Q mode Syntax VLAN Qinqmode lt port_list gt disable man customer Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports disable Disable Q in Q VLAN Mode man Q in Q MAN Port Mode customer Q in Q Customer Port Mode 268 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode VLAN Ethernet Type Description Set or show out layer VLAN tag ether type in Q in Q VLAN mode Syntax VLAN Ethtype lt port_list gt man dot1q Parameters lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports man Set out layer VLAN tag ether type MAN dotiq Set out layer VLAN tag ether type 802 1Q Default Setting N A Example SWITCH gt vlan ethtype 10 man VLAN Add Description Add or modify VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Add lt vid gt lt port_list gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 lt port_list gt Port list or all default All ports Default Setting 1 Example Add port17 to port24 in VLAN10 SWITCH gt vlan add 10 17 24 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 269 Chapter 6 Command Line Mode VLAN Delete Description Delete VLAN entry Syntax VLAN Delete lt vid gt Parameters lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 Example Delete port17 to port24 in VLAN10 SWITCH gt vlan delete 10 17 24 VLAN Lookup Description Lookup
279. tc These tags identify a module controlling specific parts of the configuration Group tags lt port_table gt lt vlan_table gt etc These tags identify a group of parameters typically a table Parameter tags lt mode gt lt entry gt etc These tags identify parameters for the specific section module and group The lt entry gt tag is used for table entries Configuration parameters are represented as attribute values When saving the configuration from the switch the entire configuration including syntax descriptions is included in the file The file may then be modified using an editor and loaded to a switch The example below shows a small configuration file only including configuration of the MAC address age time and the learning mode per port When loading this file only the included parameters will be changed This means that the age time will be set to 200 and the learn mode will be set to automatic Save Configuration 1 Press the Save Configuration button to save the current configuration in manager workstation The following screens in Figure 4 16 and 4 17 appear 58 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 16 File Download screen File Download Do you want to open or save this file E Name ntent length_168095erver Type XML Document 16 4KB From 192 168 0 100 harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or 2 While files from
280. ted in an Ethernet frame FTP is an acronym for File Transfer Protocol It is a transfer protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides file writing and reading It also provides directory service and security features IGMP snooping Fast Leave processing allows the switch to remove an interface from the forwarding table entry without first sending out group specific queries to the interface The VLAN interface is pruned from the multicast tree for the multicast group specified in the original leave message Fast leave processing ensures optimal bandwidth management for all hosts on a switched network even when multiple multicast groups are in use simultaneously HTTP is an acronym for Hypertext Transfer Protocol It is a protocol that used to transfer or convey information on the World Wide Web WWW HTTP defines how messages are formatted and transmitted and what actions Web servers and browsers should take in response to various commands For example when you enter a URL in your browser this actually sends an HTTP command to the Web server directing it to fetch and transmit the requested Web page The other main standard that controls how the World Wide Web works is HTML which covers how Web pages are formatted and displayed Any Web server machine contains in addition to the Web page files it can serve an HTTP daemon a program that is designed to wait for HTTP requests and handle them when they arrive The
281. test an Internet connection IEEE 802 1X is an IEEE standard for port based Network Access Control It provides authentication to devices attached to a LAN port establishing a point to point connection or preventing access from that port if authentication fails With 802 1X access to all switch ports can be centrally controlled from a server which means that authorized users can use the same credentials for authentication from any point within the network IGMP is an acronym for Internet Group Management Protocol It is a communications protocol used to manage the membership of Internet Protocol multicast groups IGMP is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish multicast group memberships It is an integral part of the IP multicast specification like ICMP for unicast connections IGMP can be used for online video and gaming and allows more efficient use of resources when supporting these uses A router sends IGMP Query messages onto a particular link This router is called the Querier IMAP is an acronym for Internet Message Access Protocol It is a protocol for email clients to retrieve email messages from a mail server IMAP is the protocol that IMAP clients use to communicate with the servers and SMTP is the protocol used to transport mail to an IMAP server The current version of the Internet Message Access Protocol is IMAP4 It is similar to Post Office Protocol version 3 POP3 but offers additional and more
282. the current time of the System Mode Allow to enable or disable PoE Schedule function on selected port Port Allow setting PoE schedule by specified port Schedule Day Set to enable disable PoE power providing by day Day Start Allow selecting and setting which day time wants to start PoE power providing Allow selecting and setting which day time wants to stop PoE power Day End oe providing Night Start Allow selecting and setting which night time wants to start PoE power providing Allow selecting and setting which night time wants to stop PoE Night End Pa power providing Refresh Press this button to refresh current Web page 232 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management You need to select a target port manually to enable this function The configuring tool could help you to set schedule quickly and easily For example if user wants to set Port 3 enables PoE power providing during AM 09 00 to PM 20 00 and only from Monday to Friday It just needs to choice 3 at Port and select the check boxes from Mon to Fri set Day Start Time to 9 00 Day stop time to 18 00 and Night start time to 18 00 Night stop time to 20 00 Then click Save The system will show ON for specified days and hours on the schedule table Figure 4 137 PoE Schedule configuration sample Power Over Ethernet Schedulefor Switch 1 1970 01 01 Thu 03 32 45 0000 Mode Enable v Pot 3 x 09 00 v 1
283. the network and provide backup links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions e STP Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1D e RSTP Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol IEEE 802 1w The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1W Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spanning Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions e Creates a sing
284. the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step 5 After the brackets are attached to the Managed Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 13 Figure 2 13 Mounting the GE DSG 244 in a rack gt een a f l j l ii i Y A bbi TELELE Step 6 Follow steps 4 and 5 of the Desktop Installation section to connect the network cabling and supply power to the Managed Switch 26 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 2 Installation SFP Transceiver Installation This section describes how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can insert and remove a transceiver to from any SFP port without powering down the Managed Switch as shown in Figure 2 14 Figure 2 14 Plugging in the SFP transceiver MGB SX LK vA 000Base SX LX Le Ea 7 Approved GE Security SFP Transceivers GE Security Managed Switches support both Single mode and Multi mode SFP transceivers The following list of approved GE Security SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication e SFP1000SX 220 SFP LOOOBASE SX SFP transceiver Multi mode 850nm 220m 550m e SFP1000LX 10Km SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver Single mode 1310nm 10km e SFP100FX1310 TSC 2Km SFP LOOBASE FX SFP transceiver Multi mode 850nm 2km e SFP100FX1310 TSC 20Km SFP 1O0BASE FX SFP t
285. the value of Tx Delay seconds Tx Delay cannot be larger than 1 4 of the Tx Interval value Valid values are restricted to 1 8192 seconds This attribute must comply with the rule 4 Delay Interval lt Transmission Interval Tx Reinit When a port is disabled LLDP is disabled or the switch is rebooted a LLDP shutdown frame is transmitted to the neighboring units signaling that the LLDP information isn t valid anymore Tx Reinit controls the amount of seconds between the shutdown frame and a new LLDP initialization Valid values are restricted to 1 10 seconds LLDP Port Configuration The LLDP port settings relate to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header Object Description Port The switch port number of the logical LLDP port Mode Select LLDP mode 204 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Object Description Rx only The switch will not send out LLDP information but LLDP information from neighbor units is analyzed Tx only The switch will drop LLDP information received from neighbors but will send out LLDP information Disabled The switch will not send out LLDP information and will drop LLDP information received from neighbors Enabled The switch will send out LLDP information and will analyze LLDP information received from neighbors Port Descr Optional TLV When checked the port description is included in
286. tication SNTP Configuration Web Firmware Upgrade TFTP Firmware Upgrade Configuration Save Configuration Upload Factory Default System Reboot Provides basic system description including contact information Sets the IP address for management access Allows configuring the system password required to access the web pages or log in from CLI Simple Network Time Protocol Configures SNTP client settings including broadcast mode or a specified list of servers Upgrade the firmware via Web browser Upgrade the firmware via TFTP server Save view the switch configuration to remote host Upload the switch configuration from remote host Reset the configuration of the Managed Switch Restarts the switch System Information The System Info page provides information for the current device information System Info page helps a switch administrator to identify the hardware MAC address software version and system uptime 48 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 6 System Information page screenshot System Information System Contact T Name GE DSSG 244 Location i Hardware MAC Address 00 30 4f 24 24 24 Power Status AC Power Temperature 44 0 C 111 2 F Time System Date 2009 10 21 Wed 05 59 26 0000 System Uptime _6d 02 24 43 Switch ID Software Version 1 v1 0b090925 Auto refresh C This page includes the following fields Object Description
287. tication is enabled the port has link and the Admin State is Auto and the supplicant is authenticated or the Admin State is Authorized Unauthorized The port is unauthorized This is the case when 802 1X authentication is enabled the port has link and the Admin State is Auto but the supplicant is not yet authenticated or the Admin State is Unauthorized X Auth Y Unauth X clients are currently authorized and Y are unauthorized This state is shown when 802 1 and MAC based authentication is globally enabled and the Admin State is set to MAC Based Max Clients This setting applies to ports running MAC based authentication only The maximum number of clients allowed on a given port can be configured through the list box and edit control for this setting Choosing the value All from the list box allows the port to consume up to 104 client state machines Choosing the value Specific from the list box opens up for entering a specific number of maximum clients on the port 1 to 104 The stackswitch is born with a pool of state machines from which all ports draw whenever a new client is seen on the port When a given port s maximum is reached both authorized and unauthorized clients count further new clients are disallowed access Since all ports draw from the same pool it may happen that a configured maximum cannot be granted if the remaining ports have already used all available state machines Restart
288. tion The STP ports on the Switch have built in Auto negotiation This technology automatically sets the best possible bandwidth when a connection is established with another network device usually at Power On or Reset This is done by detect the modes and speeds at the second of both device is connected and capable of both 10Base T and 100Base TX devices can connect with the port in either Half or Full Duplex mode If attached device is 100Base TX port will set to 10Mbps no auto negotiation 10Mbps 10Mbps with auto negotiation 10 20Mbps 10Base T Full Duplex 100Mbps no auto negotiation 100Mbps 100Mbps with auto negotiation 100 200Mbps 100Base TX Full Duplex 328 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 8 Power Over Ethernet Overview What is PoE Based on the global standard IEEE 802 3af PoE is a technology for wired Ethernet the most widely installed local area network technology adopted today PoE allows the electrical power necessary for the operation of each end device to be carried by data cables rather than by separate power cords New network applications such as IP Cameras VoIP Phones and Wireless Networking can help enterprises improve productivity It minimizes wires that must be used to install the network for offering lower cost and less power failures IEEE802 3af also called Data Terminal equipment DTE power via Media dependent interface MDI is an international standard to define
289. to the port as established by the classification process Class 0 is the default for PDs The PD is classified based on power The classification of the PD is the maximum power that the PD will draw across all input voltages and operational modes A PD shall return Class 0 to 3 in accordance with the maximum power draw as specified by Table 4 4 Power Reserved The Power Reserved shows how much the power the PD has reserved Power Used The Power Used shows how much power the PD currently is using Current Used The Power Used shows how much current the PD currently is using Priority The Priority shows the port s priority configured by the user Port Status The Port Status shows the port s status Total Show the total watts usage of all PDs PoE Schedule This section provides ther user a way to configure a PoE schedule The PoE schedule helps you to enable or disable PoE power feeding for PoE ports during specified time intervals and it is a powerful function to help SMB or Enterprise save power and money GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 231 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 136 Power over Ethernet Status Power Over Ethernet Schedulefor Switch 1 Current Time 1970 01 01 Thu 02 58 27 0000 Port Port 3 a 09 00 x 20 00 x 24 00 w 24 00 x Refresh This page includes the following fields Object Description Current Time Display
290. to which this QCE applies ToS Precedence Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use QoS Control List Configuration QCE Type Type Value Traffic Class ide OO cas T 0O 2 5 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the precedence part of ToS 3 bits when receiving IPv4 IPv6 packets The screen in Figure 4 65 appears Figure 4 65 Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up VLAN Tag Priority Mapping Set up the traffic class mapping to the user priority value 3 bits when receiving VLAN tagged packets QCL ID 4g Tag Priority 0 Class Normal Tag Priority 1 Class Low Tag Priority 2 Class Low Tag Priority 3 Class Normal g Tag Priority 4 Class Medium 9 Tag Priority 5 Class Medium amp Tag Priority 6 Class High D Tag Priority 7 Class High aa F Cancel Wizard lt Back Next gt GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 131 Chapter 4 Web based Management This page includes the following fields Object Description QCL ID Select the QCL ID to which this QCE applies VLAN Priority Class Select a traffic class of Low Normal Medium or High to apply to the QCE The QCL configuration wizard is finished and the new configuration is ready for use QoS Control List Configuration acie 4 Gj
291. tware When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 107 Chapter 4 Web based Management NOTE On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then sets the Root Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Description Default Value Bridge Identifier Not user A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC configurable the switch s MAC address except by setting priority The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts below a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC Priority A relative priority
292. ults in the following e One switch is elected as the root switch e The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch e Adesignated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root e A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch e Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch When STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 105 Chapter 4 Web based Management STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throug
293. ure SNMP trap on this page The SNMP Trap Configuration screen in Figure 4 25 appears Figure 4 25 SNMP Trap Configuration page screenshot SNMP Trap Configuration Trap Mode Disabled v Trap Version SNMP v1 Trap Community public Trap Destination Address 0 0 0 0 Trap Authentication Failure Enabled Trap Inform Mode Trap Inform Timeout seconds Trap Inform Retry Times This page includes the following fields Object Description Trap Mode Indicates the SNMP trap mode operation Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap mode operation Disabled Disable SNMP trap mode operation Trap Version Indicates the SNMP trap supported version Possible versions are SNMP v1 Set SNMP trap supported version 1 SNMP v2c Set SNMP trap supported version 2c SNMP v3 Set SNMP trap supported version 3 Trap Community Indicates the community access string when send SNMP trap packet The allowed string length is O to 255 and the allowed content is the ASCII characters from 33 to 126 Trap Destination Address Indicates the SNMP trap destination address Trap Authentication Failure Indicates the SNMP entity is permitted to generate authentication failure traps Possible modes are Enabled Enable SNMP trap authentication failure Disabled Disable SNMP trap authentication failure Trap Inform Mode Indicates the SNMP trap inform mode operation Possible modes are
294. ver 802 1X is that several clients can be connected to the same port e g through a 3rd party switch or a hub and still require individual authentication and that the clients don t need special supplicant software to authenticate The disadvantage is that MAC addresses can be spoofed by malicious users equipment whose MAC address is a valid RADIUS user can be used by anyone and only the MD5 Challenge method is supported The 802 1X and MAC Based Authentication configuration consists of two sections a system and a port wide Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as shown
295. vers for Microsoft Windows IBM OS 2 and other SMB client machines Samba uses the Server Message Block SMB protocol and Common Internet File System CIFS which is the underlying protocol used in Microsoft Windows networking Samba can be installed on a variety of operating system platforms including Linux most common Unix platforms OpenVMS and IBM OS 2 Samba can also register itself with the master browser on the network so that it would appear in the listing of hosts in Microsoft Windows Neighborhood Network SHA is an acronym for Secure Hash Algorithm It designed by the National Security Agency NSA and published by the NIST as a U S Federal Information Processing Standard Hash algorithms compute a fixed length digital representation known as a message digest of an input data sequence the message of any length A shaper can limit the bandwidth of transmitted frames It is located after the ingress queues SMTP is an acronym for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol It is a text based protocol that uses the Transmission Control Protocol TCP and provides a mail service modeled on the FTP file transfer service SMTP transfers mail messages between systems and notifications regarding incoming mail SNMP is an acronym for Simple Network Management Protocol It is part of the Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP protocol for network management SNMP allow diverse network objects to participate in network man
296. wser interface e Anexternal SNMP based network management application e The Administration Console The Administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the Managed Switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages and disadvantages The following table compares the three management methods Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison Method Console Web Browser SNMP Agent 36 Advantages No IP address or subnet needed Text based Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating systems Secure Ideal for configuring the switch remotely Compatible with all popular browsers Can be accessed from any location Most visually appealing Communicates with switch functions at the MIB level Based on open standards Disadvantages Must be near switch or use dial up connection Not convenient for remote users Modem connection may prove to be unreliable or slow Security can be compromised hackers need only know the IP address and subnet mask May encounter lag times on poor connections Requires SNMP manager software Least visually appealing of all three methods Some settings require calculations Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 3 Switch Management The Administration Console The Admin
297. y individual users or groups permitted or denied to specific traffic objects such as a process or a program Each accessible traffic object contains an identifier to its ACL The privileges determine whether there are specific traffic object access rights ACL implementations can be quite complex for example when the ACEs are prioritized for the various situation In networking the ACL refers to a list of service ports or network services that are available on a host or server each with a list of hosts or servers permitted or denied to use the service ACL can generally be configured to control inbound traffic and in this context they are similar to firewalls Using multiple ports in parallel to increase the link speed beyond the limits of a port and to increase the redundancy for higher availability Also Port Aggregation Link Aggregation GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 343 Appendix B Glossary Term ARP Auto Negotiation D DES DHCP DNS DoS Dotted Decimal Notation Definition ARP is an acronym for Address Resolution Protocol It is a protocol that used to convert an IP address into a physical address such as an Ethernet address ARP allows a host to communicate with other hosts when only the Internet address of its neighbors is known Before using IP the host sends a broadcast ARP request containing the Internet address of the desired destination system Auto negotiation is the pro
298. y messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual 139 Chapter 4 Web based Management Figure 4 72 IGMP State Transitions Non Member Leave Group Stop Timer Join Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group Query Received Start Timer Report Received Stop Timer Timer Expried Send report Delaying Member Idle Member e IGMP Querier A router or multicast enabled switch can periodically ask their hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic If there is more than one router switch on the LAN performing IP multicasting one of these devices is elected querier and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members It then propagates the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service NOTE Multicast routers use this information along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM to support IP multicasting across the Internet IGMP Snooping Configuration This page provides IGMP Snooping related configuration Most of the settings are global whereas the Router Port configuration is related to the currently selected stack unit as reflected by the page header 140 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 4 Web based Management The IGMP Snooping Configuration scr
299. y prefer UDP to TCP UDP provides two services not provided by the IP layer It provides port numbers to help distinguish different user requests and optionally a checksum capability to verify that the data arrived intact Common network applications that use UDP include the Domain Name System DNS streaming media applications such as IPTV Voice over IP VoIP and Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP User Priority is a 3 bit field storing the priority level for the 802 19 frame Virtual LAN A method to restrict communication between switch ports VLANs can be used for the following applications VLAN unaware switching This is the default configuration All ports are VLAN unaware with Port VLAN ID 1 and members of VLAN 1 This means that MAC addresses are learned in VLAN 1 and the switch does not remove or insert VLAN tags VLAN aware switching This is based on the IEEE 802 1Q standard All ports are VLAN aware Ports connected to VLAN aware switches are members of multiple VLANs and transmit tagged frames Other ports are members of one VLAN set up with this Port VLAN ID and transmit untagged frames Provider switching This is also known as Q in Q switching Ports connected to subscribers are VLAN unaware members of one VLAN and set up with this unique Port VLAN ID Ports connected to the service provider are VLAN aware members of multiple VLANs and set up to tag all frames Untagged frames received ona subscriber port are
300. yword is used the rule applies to Syntax ACL Add lt ace_id gt lt ace_id_next gt switch port lt port gt policy lt policy gt lt sid gt lt vid gt lt tag_prio gt lt dmac_type gt etype lt etype gt lt smac gt lt dmac gt arp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt smac gt lt arp_opcode gt lt arp_flags gt lip lt sip gt lt dip gt lt protocol gt lt ip_flags gt icmp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt icmp_type gt lt icmp_code gt lt ip_flags gt udp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt lt ip_flags gt tcp lt sip gt lt dip gt lt sport gt lt dport gt Parameters lt ace_id gt ACE ID 1 1024 default Next available ID lt ace_id_next gt Next ACE ID 1 1024 default Add ACE last 304 GE DSG 244 DSSG 244 and 244 PoE User Manual Chapter 6 Command Line Mode switch Switch ACE keyword port Port ACE keyword lt port gt Port number policy Policy ACE keyword lt policy gt Policy number 1 8 lt sid gt Switch ID 1 16 or any lt vid gt VLAN ID 1 4095 or any lt tag_prio gt VLAN tag priority 0 7 or any lt dmac_type gt DMAC type any unicast multicast broadcast etype Ethernet Type keyword lt etype gt Ethernet Type or any lt smac gt Source MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx or any lt dmac gt Destination MAC address xx xx xx xx xx xx or

Enterprise-class User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents